CLAOperator's Manual

Order no. 65155221 13 Part no. 1175843400 Edition Edition F 2014

É1175843400,ËÍ1175843400

CLAO

perat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-man International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐Dis‐playplay

This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMAND dis-play.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-tected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 02.05.2013

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.You can also use the CLA Guide smartphoneapp:

Apple® iOS

Android™

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp may not yet be available in your country.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1175843400 É1175843400,ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 21

At a glance ........................................... 29

Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 75

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107

Climate control ................................. 123

Driving and parking .......................... 139

On-board computer and displays .... 195

Stowage and features ...................... 255

Maintenance and care ...................... 281

Breakdown assistance ..................... 295

Wheels and tires ............................... 313

Technical data ................................... 345

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets4ETS

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4ETS (Electronic Traction System) .... 684MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 178

Display message ............................ 241

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 214Function/notes ................................ 63Important safety notes .................... 64Warning lamp ................................. 245

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 129Active Parking Assist

Canceling ....................................... 185Detecting parking spaces .............. 182Display message ............................ 234Exiting a parking space .................. 184Function/notes ............................. 181Important safety notes .................. 181Parking .......................................... 183

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 71Adaptive Brake Assist

Display message ............................ 222Function/notes ................................ 66

Adaptive Highbeam AssistDisplay message ............................ 229Function/notes ............................. 112Switching on/off ........................... 113

Additional speedometer ................... 207Additives (engine oil) ........................ 350Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 41Display message ............................ 225Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 44Important safety notes .................... 43Knee bag .......................................... 45PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 47

Safety guidelines ............................. 42Side impact air bag .......................... 46Window curtain air bag .................... 47

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 136Rear ............................................... 137Setting ........................................... 136Setting the center air vents ........... 136Setting the side air vents ............... 136

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72Switching off (ATA) .......................... 72Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 72

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 208

AMGPerformance Seat .......................... 100

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 210Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 264Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 204Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 204ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 287Hiding a service message .............. 287Notes ............................................. 286Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 287Service message ............................ 286Special service requirements ......... 287

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 72Function ........................................... 72Switching off the alarm .................... 72

4 Index

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 206Display message ............................ 232Function/notes ............................. 189

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 202Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 229see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 144Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 143Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 149Automatic drive program ............... 151Changing gear ............................... 149DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 146Drive program display .................... 147Driving tips .................................... 149Emergency running mode .............. 155Engaging drive position .................. 148Engaging neutral ............................ 148Engaging park position (AMGvehi-cles) ............................................... 149Engaging reverse gear ................... 147Engaging the park position ............ 147Holding the vehicle stationary onuphill gradients .............................. 149Kickdown ....................................... 150Manual drive program .................... 152Overview ........................................ 146Problem (malfunction) ................... 155Program selector button ................ 150Pulling away ................................... 142Selector lever ................................ 148Starting the engine ........................ 142Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 151Transmission position dis-play ........................................ 147, 148Transmission positions .................. 149

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 155

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 117Display message ............................ 228

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 78Important safety notes .................... 78Replacing ......................................... 78

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 303Display message ............................ 231Important safety notes .................. 301Jump starting ................................. 305

Beltsee Seat belts

Belt force limiterActivation ......................................... 55Function ........................................... 55

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 206Display message ............................ 234Notes/function .............................. 191

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 220Notes ............................................. 350

Brake lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 117Display message ............................ 227

BrakesABS .................................................. 63Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66BAS .................................................. 64Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 350Display message ............................ 214HOLD function ............................... 176Important safety notes .................. 162Maintenance .................................. 163Parking brake ................................ 158Riding tips ...................................... 162Warning lamp ................................. 245

Index 5

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbssee Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 23

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

CareCarpets .......................................... 294Car wash ........................................ 288Display ........................................... 292Exhaust pipe .................................. 292Exterior lights ................................ 291Gear or selector lever .................... 293Interior ........................................... 292Matte finish ................................... 290Notes ............................................. 287Paint .............................................. 289Plastic trim .................................... 292Power washer ................................ 289Rear view camera .......................... 291Roof lining ...................................... 294Seat belt ........................................ 294Seat cover ..................................... 293Sensors ......................................... 291Steering wheel ............................... 293Trim pieces .................................... 293Washing by hand ........................... 288Wheels ........................................... 289Windows ........................................ 290Wiper blades .................................. 290Wooden trim .................................. 293

Cargo compartment enlargement ... 259Cargo tie down rings ......................... 261Car wash (care) ................................. 288Center console

Lower section .................................. 35Upper section .................................. 34

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 209Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 117Cornering light function ................. 117High-beam headlamps ................... 116Low-beam headlamps .................... 116Rear fog lamp ................................ 117Reversing lamps ............................ 117Turn signals (front) ......................... 117Turn signals (rear) .......................... 117

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 62Rear doors ....................................... 62

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 56Restraint systems ............................ 56Special seat belt retractor ............... 59

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 60On the front-passenger seat ............ 59Top Tether ....................................... 61

Cigarette lighter ................................ 265Climate control

Automatic climate control ............. 125Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 127Controlling automatically ............... 131Cooling with air dehumidification .. 129Defrosting the windows ................. 133Defrosting the windshield .............. 133Important safety notes .................. 124Indicator lamp ................................ 131Maximum cooling .......................... 133Notes on using dual-zone auto-matic climate control ............. 126, 128Overview of systems ...................... 124Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 131Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 135Refrigerant ..................................... 352Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 353Setting the air distribution ............. 132

6 Index

Setting the airflow ......................... 132Setting the air vents ...................... 136Setting the temperature ................ 131Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 135Switching on/off ........................... 129Switching residual heat on/off ...... 135Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 134Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 132

CockpitOverview .......................................... 30see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating the dis-tance warning function .................. 205Display message ............................ 214Operation/notes .............................. 64

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 206Display message ............................ 221Operation/notes .............................. 67

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 110Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 279Calling up ....................................... 278Setting ........................................... 278

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 199Convenience closing feature .............. 88Convenience opening feature ............ 88Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 285Display message ............................ 230Filling capacity ............................... 351Important safety notes .................. 351Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 210Temperature gauge ........................ 196Warning lamp ................................. 251

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 27

Cornering light functionChanging bulbs .............................. 117Display message ............................ 226Function/notes ............................. 111

Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 114Cruise control

Activation conditions ..................... 166Cruise control lever ....................... 166Deactivating ................................... 167Display message ............................ 236Driving system ............................... 166Function/notes ............................. 166Important safety notes .................. 166Setting a speed .............................. 167Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 167

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 263Important safety notes .................. 262Rear compartment ......................... 263

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 26Customer Relations Department ....... 26

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 228Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 208Switching on/off (switch) .............. 109

Declarations of conformity ................. 25Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 208Interior lighting .............................. 209

Diagnostics connection ...................... 25Digital speedometer ......................... 200DIRECT SELECT lever

see Automatic transmissionDisplay (cleaning instructions) ........ 292

Index 7

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 286Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 213Driving systems ............................. 232Engine ............................................ 230General notes ................................ 213Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 213Lights ............................................. 226Safety systems .............................. 214SmartKey ....................................... 243Tires ............................................... 237Vehicle ........................................... 239

Distance recorder ............................. 199see Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning functionActivating/deactivating ................. 205Function/notes ................................ 64Warning lamp ................................. 253

DISTRONIC PLUSActivation conditions ..................... 170Cruise control lever ....................... 169Deactivating ................................... 173Display message ............................ 235Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 174Driving tips .................................... 174Function/notes ............................. 168Important safety notes .................. 168Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 172Warning lamp ................................. 253

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 209Automatic locking (switch) ............... 83Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 76Control panel ................................... 37Display message ............................ 241Emergency locking ........................... 83Emergency unlocking ....................... 83Important safety notes .................... 81Opening (from inside) ...................... 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 161

Drive programAutomatic ...................................... 151Display ........................................... 148Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 147Manual ........................................... 152SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 211

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driver's seatsee Seats

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 287Symmetrical low beam .................. 108

Driving on flooded roads .................. 165Driving safety systems

4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ................................................. 68ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 63ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 71Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 64COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 64COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 67Distance warning function ............... 64EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 71ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 67ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 68ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 68Important safety information ........... 63Overview .......................................... 63STEER CONTROL ............................. 71

Driving systemsActive Parking Assist ..................... 181ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 189Blind Spot Assist ............................ 191Cruise control ................................ 166Display message ............................ 232DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 168HOLD function ............................... 176Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 193Lane Tracking package .................. 191PARKTRONIC ................................. 178RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 177

8 Index

Rear view camera .......................... 186Speed Limit Assist ......................... 190

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 149Brakes ........................................... 162Break-in period .............................. 140Checking brake lining thickness .... 164DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174Downhill gradient ........................... 162Drinking and driving ....................... 161Driving abroad ............................... 108Driving in winter ............................. 165Driving on flooded roads ................ 165Driving on wet roads ...................... 165Exhaust check ............................... 161Fuel ................................................ 161General .......................................... 160Hydroplaning ................................. 165Icy road surfaces ........................... 165Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 163Snow chains .................................. 317Symmetrical low beam .................. 108Wet road surface ........................... 163

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 202DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 203

EEASY-VARIO-PLUS system

Cargo compartment enlargement .. 259EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 216Function/notes ................................ 71

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 161On-board computer ....................... 200

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 144Automatic engine switch-off .......... 143Deactivating/activating ................. 144General information ....................... 143Important safety notes .................. 143Introduction ................................... 143

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 83Trunk ............................................... 86Vehicle ............................................. 83

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 41Function ........................................... 55Safety guidelines ............................. 42

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 22

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 251Display message ............................ 230ECO start/stop function ................ 143Engine number ............................... 347Irregular running ............................ 145Jump-starting ................................. 305Starting problems .......................... 145Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 142Switching off .................................. 158Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 310

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 145

Engine jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 284Additives ........................................ 350Checking the oil level ..................... 283Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 284Display message ............................ 231Filling capacity ............................... 350Notes about oil grades ................... 349Notes on oil level/consumption .... 283Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 210Viscosity ........................................ 350

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

4ETS ................................................ 68AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 211Characteristics ................................. 68Deactivating/activating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 69

Index 9

Deactivating/activating (exceptAMG vehicles) ................................ 205Deactivating/activating (notes;except AMG vehicles) ...................... 69Display message ............................ 214ETS .................................................. 68ETS/4ETS ........................................ 68Function/notes ................................ 67General notes .................................. 67Important safety information ........... 68Trailer stabilization ........................... 71Warning lamp ................................. 247

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 68ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 68Exhaust check ................................... 161Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 292Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 108see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 103Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 103Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 210Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104Setting ........................................... 104Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 105Storing the parking position .......... 104

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 257

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFilling capacities (Technical data) ... 347Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 297Preparing the vehicle ..................... 296TIREFIT kit ...................................... 298

Floormats ........................................... 279Fog lamps

Extended range .............................. 112Switching on/off ........................... 109

Front fog lampsDisplay message ............................ 227Switching on/off ........................... 109

Front windshieldsee Windshield

FuelAdditives ........................................ 349Consumption statistics .................. 199Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 200Displaying the range ...................... 200Driving tips .................................... 161Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Grade (gasoline) ............................ 348Important safety notes .................. 348Premium-grade unleaded gaso-line ................................................. 348Problem (malfunction) ................... 157Refueling ........................................ 155Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 348

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 156

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 200

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 348Problem (malfunction) ................... 157

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 311Before changing ............................. 310Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 310Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 311Important safety notes .................. 310

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 277General notes ................................ 274Important safety notes .................. 275Opening/closing the garage door .. 277Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 275

Gear indicator (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 210

10 Index

Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 293Genuine parts ...................................... 21Glove box ........................................... 257

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 111

Display message ............................ 242Headlamps

Fogging up ..................................... 113see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ......................................... 99Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100Adjusting (manually) ........................ 99Adjusting (rear) .............................. 100

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 227Switching on/off ........................... 110

Hill start assist .................................. 142HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 176Deactivating ................................... 177Display message ............................ 233Function/notes ............................. 176

HoodClosing ........................................... 283Display message ............................ 241Important safety notes .................. 282Opening ......................................... 282

Hydroplaning ..................................... 165

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 72Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsIndicators

see Turn signals

Inspectionsee ASSYST PLUS

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 31Settings ......................................... 207Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 196Interior lighting ................................. 113

Automatic control .......................... 114Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 209Emergency lighting ........................ 114Manual control ............................... 114Overview ........................................ 113Reading lamp ................................. 113Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 208

JJack

Storage location ............................ 296Using ............................................. 337

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 305

KKickdown

Driving tips .................................... 150Manual drive program .................... 154

Knee bag .............................................. 45

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 206Display message ............................ 233Function/information .................... 193

Lane Tracking package ..................... 191Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 211LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 60License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 227

Index 11

Light function, activeDisplay message ............................ 229

LightsActivating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 209Automatic headlamp mode ............ 109Cornering light function ................. 111Display message ............................ 226Driving abroad ............................... 108Fog lamps ...................................... 109Fog lamps (extended) .................... 112Hazard warning lamps ................... 111High beam flasher .......................... 111High-beam headlamps ................... 110Light switch ................................... 108Low-beam headlamps .................... 109Parking lamps ................................ 110Rear fog lamp ................................ 109Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 208Standing lamps .............................. 110Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 208Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) .................... 109Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 208Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 208Turn signals ................................... 110see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Light sensor (display message) ....... 229Loading guidelines ............................ 256Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 83Emergency locking ........................... 83From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 82

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 209Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 226Setting for driving abroad (sym-metrical) ........................................ 108Switching on/off ........................... 109

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 100

MM+S tires ............................................ 316Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 290mbrace

Call priority .................................... 270Display message ............................ 220Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 270Downloading routes ....................... 273Emergency call .............................. 267General notes ................................ 266Geo fencing ................................... 274Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 272MB info call button ........................ 269Remote vehicle locking .................. 272Roadside Assistance button .......... 268Search & Send ............................... 271Self-test ......................................... 267Speed alert .................................... 274System .......................................... 267Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 274Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 273Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 272

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 77Inserting .......................................... 77Locking vehicle ................................ 83Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83

Media Interfacesee Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 202

12 Index

Memory function ............................... 105Mercedes-Benz CONNECT

Recovering a stolen vehicle ........... 272Search & Send ............................... 271

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 213Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 203

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 77MOExtended tires .............................. 297Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 340Mounting a new wheel ................... 339Preparing the vehicle ..................... 336Raising the vehicle ......................... 337Removing a wheel .......................... 339Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 337

MP3Operation ....................................... 202see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 198Permanent display ......................... 208

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 197Overview .......................................... 33

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201see separate operating instructions

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 140

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 51Operation ......................................... 47System self-test ............................... 50

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 56Important safety notes .................... 40

OCSFaults ............................................... 51Operation ......................................... 47System self-test ............................... 50

Oilsee Engine oil

On-board computerAMG menu ..................................... 210Assistance menu ........................... 204Audio menu ................................... 202Convenience submenu .................. 210Displaying a service message ........ 287Display messages .......................... 213DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174Factory settings submenu ............. 210Important safety notes .................. 196Instrument cluster submenu .......... 207Lighting submenu .......................... 208Menu overview .............................. 199Message memory .......................... 213Navigation menu ............................ 201Operation ....................................... 197RACETIMER ................................... 211Service menu ................................. 207Settings menu ............................... 207Standard display ............................ 199Telephone menu ............................ 203Trip menu ...................................... 199Vehicle submenu ........................... 209Video DVD operation ..................... 203

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 117Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 25Important safety notes .................... 24

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Index 13

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 22

Outside temperature display ........... 197Overhead control panel ...................... 36Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 63

PPaint code number ............................ 346Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 289Panic alarm .......................................... 40Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 90Opening/closing the roller sun-blind ................................................. 93Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94Rain closing feature ......................... 92Resetting ......................................... 93

Parcel net ........................................... 259Parking ............................................... 157

Important safety notes .................. 157Parking brake ................................ 158Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 104Rear view camera .......................... 186see Active Parking Assistsee PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 181see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 217Electric parking brake .................... 158Warning lamp ................................. 250

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 110

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 180Driving system ............................... 178Function/notes ............................. 178Important safety notes .................. 178Problem (malfunction) ................... 181

Range of the sensors ..................... 179Warning display ............................. 180

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFProblems (malfunction) .................. 225

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 47Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 292Power washers .................................. 289Power windows

see Side windowsProgram selector button .................. 150Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 21Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 142

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 26

RRACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 177RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 211Radar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 209Display message ............................ 233

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 202see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 25Rain closing feature (panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 92Reading lamp ..................................... 113Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 137Rear fog lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 117Display message ............................ 228Switching on/off ........................... 109

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear seatsFolding the backrest forwards/back ............................................... 260

14 Index

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 291Function/notes ............................. 186Switching on/off ........................... 186

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 103Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 135Switching on/off ........................... 134

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 352Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Important safety notes .................. 155Refueling process .......................... 156see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 274Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 275

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 114Overview of bulb types .................. 115Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 116

Reporting safety defects .................... 26Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 231Warning lamp ................................. 251see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 135Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 148Reversing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 91Roller sunblinds ............................... 92Side windows ................................... 87

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23

Roller sunblindOpening/closing .............................. 93Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 92

Roof carrier ........................................ 261Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 294Roof load (maximum) ........................ 353Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 201

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 56Child restraint systems .................... 56Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 47

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SeatAdjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 100

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 54Belt force limiters ............................ 55Cleaning ......................................... 294Correct usage .................................. 52Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 55Fastening ......................................... 53Important safety guidelines ............. 52Releasing ......................................... 54Safety guidelines ............................. 42Warning lamp ................................. 243Warning lamp (function) ................... 55

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 99Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 100Adjusting the head restraint ............ 99Cleaning the cover ......................... 293Correct driver's seat position ........... 96Folding the backrest (rear com-partment) forwards/back .............. 260Important safety notes .................... 97Seat heating problem .................... 102

Index 15

Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 105Switching seat heating on/off ....... 101

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 291Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 207Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 350Coolant (engine) ............................ 351Engine oil ....................................... 349Fuel ................................................ 348Important safety notes .................. 347Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 352Washer fluid ................................... 352

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 210On-board computer ....................... 207

Setting the air distribution ............... 132Setting the airflow ............................ 132SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 211Side impact air bag ............................. 46Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 228Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 290Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 88Important safety information ........... 86Opening/closing .............................. 87Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90Resetting ......................................... 88

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 78Changing the programming ............. 77Checking the battery ....................... 78Convenience closing feature ............ 88Convenience opening feature .......... 88Display message ............................ 243Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76Important safety notes .................... 76Loss ................................................. 80Mechanical key ................................ 77Positions (ignition lock) ................. 141

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80Starting the engine ........................ 142

SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 141Snow chains ...................................... 317Sockets

Center console .............................. 265Points to observe before use ......... 265Rear compartment ......................... 266Trunk ............................................. 266

Specialist workshop ............................ 26Special seat belt retractor .................. 59Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeed Limit Assist

Activating/deactivating the warn-ing function .................................... 205Display message ............................ 232Display message in the multifunc-tion display .................................... 191Function/notes ............................. 190Important safety notes .................. 190

SpeedometerActivating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 207Digital ............................................ 200In the Instrument cluster ................. 31Segments ...................................... 197Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 207see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 69Warning lamp ................................. 248

SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem)

Display message ............................ 222Introduction ..................................... 40Warning lamp ................................. 250Warning lamp (function) ................... 41

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 228Switching on/off ........................... 110

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 141STEER CONTROL .................................. 71

16 Index

Steering (display message) .............. 242Steering wheel

Adjusting (manually) ...................... 102Button overview ............................... 33Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 197Cleaning ......................................... 293Important safety notes .................. 102Paddle shifters ............................... 151

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 151Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 211Stowage areas ................................... 256Stowage compartments

Armrest (front) ............................... 258Armrest (under) ............................. 258Center console .............................. 257Center console (rear) ..................... 259Cup holders ................................... 262Eyeglasses compartment ............... 257Glove box ....................................... 257Important safety information ......... 256Parcel net ...................................... 259Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 258

Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 261Summer tires ..................................... 316Sun visor ............................................ 263Supplemental restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 208Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 135

TTachometer ........................................ 197Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 227see Lights

Tanksee Fuel tank

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 31

Technical dataInformation .................................... 346Tires/wheels ................................. 340Vehicle data ................................... 353

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 270Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 270Downloading routes ....................... 273Emergency call .............................. 267General notes ................................ 266Geo fencing ................................... 274Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 272MB info call button ........................ 269Remote vehicle locking .................. 272Roadside Assistance button .......... 268Search & Send ............................... 271Self-test ......................................... 267Speed alert .................................... 274System .......................................... 267Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 274Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 273Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 272

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 203Display message ............................ 242Menu (on-board computer) ............ 203Number from the phone book ........ 204Redialing ........................................ 204Rejecting/ending a call ................. 203

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 196Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 210Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 210Outside temperature ...................... 197Setting (climate control) ................ 131

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 72Immobilizer ...................................... 72

Through-loading ................................ 259Through-loading feature ................... 259Time

see separate operating instructionsTiming (RACETIMER) ......................... 211TIREFIT kit .......................................... 298

Index 17

Tire pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 321Checking manually ........................ 320Display message ............................ 237Important safety notes .................. 321Maximum ....................................... 320Notes ............................................. 319Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 300Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 300Recommended ............................... 317

Tire pressure monitoring systemChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 322Function/notes ............................. 321General notes ................................ 321Important safety notes .................. 321Restarting ...................................... 323Warning lamp ................................. 254Warning message .......................... 323

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 334Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 333Bar (definition) ............................... 333Changing a wheel .......................... 335Characteristics .............................. 333Checking ........................................ 315Curb weight (definition) ................. 334Definition of terms ......................... 333Direction of rotation ...................... 336Display message ............................ 237Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 335DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 332DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 333GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 333GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 334GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 334Important safety notes .................. 314Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 333Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 334Labeling (overview) ........................ 329

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 335Load index ..................................... 332Load index (definition) ................... 334M+S tires ....................................... 316Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 334Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 334Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 334Maximum tire load ......................... 327Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 334MOExtended tires .......................... 316Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 335PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 334Replacing ....................................... 336Service life ..................................... 316Sidewall (definition) ....................... 335Speed rating (definition) ................ 334Storing ........................................... 336Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 333Summer tires ......................... 165, 316Temperature .................................. 329TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 335Tire bead (definition) ...................... 335Tire pressure (definition) ................ 335Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 333Tire size (data) ............................... 340Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 330Tire tread ....................................... 315Tire tread (definition) ..................... 335Total load limit (definition) ............. 335Traction ......................................... 328Traction (definition) ....................... 335Tread wear ..................................... 328Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 328Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 333Wear indicator (definition) ............. 335Wheel and tire combination ........... 342Wheel rim (definition) .................... 333see Flat tire

18 Index

Top Tether ............................................ 61Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 307Installing the towing eye ................ 308Removing the towing eye ............... 309

Towing a trailerESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 71

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 309With front axle raised ..................... 309

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 310Important safety notes .................. 307Installing the towing eye ................ 308Removing the towing eye ............... 309

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 147Transporting the vehicle .................. 309Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 293Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 199Trip meter

see Trip odometerTrip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 199Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 200

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 86Emergency release button ............... 86Important safety notes .................... 84Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 84Opening (automatically from out-side) ................................................. 85Opening automatically frominside ............................................... 85

Trunk emergency release button ....... 86Trunk lid

Display message ............................ 241Opening dimensions ...................... 353

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 353Turn signals

Changing bulbs (front) ................... 117Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 117

Display message ............................ 226Switching on/off ........................... 110

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 83From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 82

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 264Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 26Equipment ....................................... 22Individual settings .......................... 207Limited Warranty ............................. 27Loading .......................................... 324Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76Lowering ........................................ 340Maintenance .................................... 23Parking for a long period ................ 160Pulling away ................................... 142Raising ........................................... 337Reporting problems ......................... 26Securing from rolling away ............ 337Towing away .................................. 307Tow-starting ................................... 307Transporting .................................. 309Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76Vehicle data ................................... 353

Vehicle data ....................................... 353Vehicle dimensions ........................... 353Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 346Vehicle maintenance

see ASSYST PLUSVehicle tool kit .................................. 296Video (DVD) ........................................ 203VIN ...................................................... 346

Index 19

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 245Brakes ........................................... 245Check Engine ................................. 251Coolant .......................................... 251Distance warning ........................... 253DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 253ESP® .............................................. 247ESP® OFF ....................................... 248Fuel tank ........................................ 251Overview .......................................... 32PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 47Reserve fuel ................................... 251Seat belt ........................................ 243SPORT handling mode ................... 248SRS ................................................ 250Tire pressure monitor .................... 254

Warranty .............................................. 22Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 242Wheel and tire combination

see TiresWheel bolt tightening torque ........... 340Wheel chock ...................................... 337Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 335Checking ........................................ 315Cleaning ......................................... 289Cleaning (warning) ......................... 336Important safety notes .................. 314Interchanging/changing ................ 336Mounting a new wheel ................... 339Mounting a wheel .......................... 336Removing a wheel .......................... 339Storing ........................................... 336Tightening torque ........................... 340Wheel size/tire size ....................... 340

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 223Operation ......................................... 47

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 133

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 286Notes ............................................. 352

Windshield wipersDisplay message ............................ 242Problem (malfunction) ................... 121Replacing the wiper blades ............ 119Switching on/off ........................... 118

Winter drivingSlippery road surfaces ................... 165Snow chains .................................. 317

Winter operationGeneral notes ................................ 316

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 316

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 290Important safety notes .................. 119Replacing (windshield) ................... 119

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 293Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 132

20 Index

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

Introduction 21

Z

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 346).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle appliesin accordance with the warranty terms andconditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. The new Service and War-ranty Information booklet will be posted toyou.

22 Introduction

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a rea-sonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ormore substantial defects or malfunctions inthe vehicle that are covered by its expresswarranty. During the period of 18 monthsfrom original delivery of the vehicle or theaccumulation of 18,000miles (approximately29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,whichever occurs first, a reasonable numberof repair attempts is presumed for a retailbuyer or lessee if one or more of the followingoccurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely tocause death or serious bodily injury if thevehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-tion has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly noti-fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writingof the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-tion of a less serious nature than cate-gory (1) has been subject to repair four ormore times and you have directly notifiedus in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

Introduction 23

Z

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

24 Introduction

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet the

Introduction 25

Z

requirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problem

again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

26 Introduction

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 27

Z

28

Cockpit ................................................. 30Instrument cluster .............................. 31Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33Center console .................................... 34Overhead control panel ...................... 36Door control panel .............................. 37

29

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddleshifters 151

; Combination switch 110

= Instrument cluster 31

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 146

B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 178

C Overhead control panel 36

Function Page

D Climate control systems 124

E Ignition lock 141

F Adjusts the steering wheel 102

G Cruise control lever 166

H Electric parking brake 158

I Light switch 108

J Diagnostics connection 25

K Opens the hood 282

30 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page

: Speedometer with seg-ments 197

; Multifunction display 198

= Tachometer 197

Function Page

? Coolant temperature 196

A Fuel gauge

B Instrument cluster lighting 196

Instrument cluster 31

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: L Low-beam head-lamps 109

; T Parking lamps 110

= K High-beam head-lamps 110

? ÷ ESP® 247

A Electric parking brake (red)F (USA only)! (Canada only) 250

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 250

C · Distance warning 253

D #! Turn signals 110

E 6 SRS 250

F ü Seat belt 243

Function Page

G M SPORT handlingmode in AMG vehicles 248

H ? Coolant 251

I R Rear fog lamp 109

J N Fog lamps 109

K ; Check Engine 251

L h Tire pressure monitor 254

M æ Reserve fuel 251

N å ESP® OFF 247

O ! ABS 245

P Brakes 245$ (USA only)J (Canada only)

32 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 198

; Audio/COMAND display;see the separate operatinginstructions

= ?

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 203Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function Page

A =;

Selects a menu 1979:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 197a

Confirms your selection 197Hides display messages 213

B %

Back 197Switches off the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 33

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Audio system/COMAND;see the separate operatinginstructions

; c Seat heating 101

= c PARKTRONIC 178

? ¤ ECO start/stop func-tion 143

Function Page

A £ Hazard warninglamps 111

B 4 PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp 47

C Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 150å AMG vehicles: ESP® 69

34 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

: Ashtray 264Cigarette lighter 265Socket 265Stowage compartment 256

; Stowage compartment 256

= Cup holder 262

Function Page

? Stowage compartmentwithMedia Interface 256

A Audio/COMAND control-ler; see the separate oper-ating instructions

Center console 35

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 114

; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 113

= | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 114

? ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 269

A Rear-view mirror 103

B Sets the compass 278

C Buttons for the garage dooropener 277

D G SOS button (mbracesystem) 267

Function Page

E F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 268

F Eyeglasses compartment 257

G 3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 91

H c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 114

I p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 113

36 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 81

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 82

= r45= Savesthe seat and exterior mirrorsettings 105

? Adjusts the seats electri-cally 99

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 103

Function Page

B W Opens/closes theside windows 87

C n Activates/deacti-vates the override featurefor the side windows in therear compartment 63

D o Opens the trunk 85

Door control panel 37

Ataglance

38

Useful information .............................. 40Panic alarm .......................................... 40Occupant safety .................................. 40Children in the vehicle ........................ 56Driving safety systems ....................... 63Theft deterrent locking system ......... 72

39

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Occupant safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint systems couldresult in them not functioning properly anymore. The restraint systems could then nolonger protect vehicle occupants as they are

designed to do and could fail in the event of anaccident or activate unexpectedly, for exam-ple. There is an increased risk of injury.Never modify parts of the restraint systems.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.USA only: for further information contact ourCustomer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).

In this section, you will learn the most impor-tant facts about the restraint system compo-nents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:RSeat beltsRChild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securingsystem

Additional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RAir bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp- Front-passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)

Although the systems are independent, theirprotective functions work in conjunction witheach other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraintsystems for infants and children, see "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 56).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAir bagsRAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)

40 Occupant safetySafety

REmergency Tensioning Devices for thefront seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rearRSeat belt force limiter for the front seatbelts and the outer seat belts in the rear

SRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehi-cle's interior in the event of an accident. It canalso reduce the forces to which vehicle occu-pants are subjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, restraint systemcomponents may be triggered unintentionallyor might not be triggered at all in the event ofan accident with a high rate of vehicle decel-eration. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Have SRS checked and repaired immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operational read-iness when the6 SRS indicator lamp goesout while the engine is running.There is a malfunction if:Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not lightup when the ignition is switched onRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp does not go out after a fewsecondsRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up again

Triggering of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bagsDuring the first stage of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates important physicaldata relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRmagnitudeBased on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers theEmergency Tensioning Device in the firststage.If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direc-tion, the front air bags are also deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The air bag control unit evaluates vehi-cle deceleration or acceleration in the eventof a collision. In the first deployment stage,the front air bag is filled with enough propel-lant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. Thefront air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is reached within a fewmilliseconds.The Emergency Tensioning Device and air bagtriggering thresholds are variable and areadapted to the detected rate of decelerationor acceleration of the vehicle. This process ispre-emptive in nature. The triggering processmust take place in good time at the start ofthe collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors that can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

decisive role in the deployment of an air bag,nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle may be deformed significantly,e.g. the hood or the fender, without an air bagbeing deployed. This is the case if only partswhich are relatively easily deformed are affec-ted and the rate of deceleration is not high.Conversely, air bags may be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor defor-mation. This is the case if, for example, veryrigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficient decelerationoccurs as a result.

i The front Emergency Tensioning Devicescan only be triggered if the seat belttongues on the front seats are correctlyengaged in the seat belt buckles.

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different air bag systems workindependently of each other.How the air bag system works is deter-mined by predicting the severity of the acci-dent, especially vehicle deceleration oracceleration, and the type of accident:Rhead-on collisionRside impactRrollover

Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emer-gency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) andair bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchloratematerial, which may require special han-dling and regard for the environment.Check your national disposal guidelines. In

California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to functionon a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts, as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash, theymaynot be able to provide adequate protection.RDo not make any modifications to the SRSwiring or components.RDo not modify or remove any componentsor parts of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seatcovers, badges, etc. to the:- padded steering wheel boss- knee bag covers- front-passenger air bag cover- outer side of front seat bolsters- outer seat bolsters of the rear bench seatbackrest

- roof frame trimRDo not install additional electrical/elec-tronic equipment on or near SRS compo-nents and wiring.RKeep the area between the air bags andoccupants free of objects (e.g. packages,handbags, umbrellas etc.).RDo not hang any objects such as coat hang-ers on the coat hooks or the grab handleabove the door. These itemsmay be thrownaround in the vehicle and cause head andother injuries when the window curtain airbag is deployed.RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot afteran air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever rest your feet on the dashboard orthe seat. Always keep both feet on the floorin front of the seat.

42 Occupant safetySafety

RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians. Con-sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RFor your protection and the protection ofothers, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must be fol-lowed. These are available from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentiallymore seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle is equip-ped with SRS. Also, refer them to the appli-cable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after the airbag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have thedeployed air bags replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the potentialof injury and fatality in certain:Rfrontal impacts (driver's/front-passengerair bags and knee bags)Rside impacts (side impact air bags and win-dow curtain air bags)Rrollover (window curtain air bags)However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder temporarily comes out ofthe air bags. This dust, however, is generallyneither harmful to your health, nor does itindicate a fire in the vehicle. In order to pre-vent potential breathing difficulties, you maywish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have any breathing diffi-culty but cannot get out of the vehicle afterthe air bag inflates, then get fresh air by open-ing a window or door.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of a col-lision, you must always be in the normal seatposition with your back against the backrest.Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it iscorrectly positioned on your body.As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back as pos-sible, still permitting proper operation ofvehicle controls. The distance from the cen-ter of the driver's chest to the center of theair bag cover on the steering wheel must beat least 10 inches (25 cm). You should beable to accomplish this by adjusting theseat and steering wheel. If you have anydifficulties, please contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Rdo not lean your head or chest close to thesteering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury if the driver front air baginflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far backas possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, shouldnever place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result inserious or fatal injuries should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat belt prop-erly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of thechild.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safety informa-tion. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator'sManual.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty for peo-ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. Toavoid this, you may wish to get out of thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You canalso open the window to allow fresh air toenter the vehicle interior. The6SRSwarn-ing lamp lights up.The air bag installation locations are identi-fied by the AIR BAG symbol.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only in

the event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protec-tion.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deployment thresh-olds, the air bags will not deploy. The driverand passenger will then be protected to theextent possible by a properly fastened seatbelt. A properly fastened seat belt is also nee-ded to provide the best possible protection ina rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

i After an air bag has been deployed, havethe vehicle towed to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, even if your vehicle isready to drive.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front air

44 Occupant safetySafety

bag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.The front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front passenger's head andchest.They are deployed:Rat the start of an accidentwith a high rate ofvehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRif the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of other air bags in the vehi-cle

The release time of the front air bags isdependent upon the use of the seat belt.If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The air bag control unit evaluates vehi-cle deceleration or acceleration in the eventof a collision. In the first deployment stage,the front air bag is filled with part of the totalavailable propellant gas, thereby reducing therisk of injury. If the air bag control unit rec-ognizes within a few milliseconds that thevehicle is being braked or accelerated fasterthan originally predicted, the front air bag isfilled with the maximum amount of propellantgas available.The deployment of the front-passenger frontair bag is also influenced by the weight cate-gory of the front passenger, which is deter-mined by the Occupant Classification System(OCS) (Y page 47).The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) for sec-ond stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the front airbags are inflated with the maximum amountof propellant gas available.

The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-sor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupiedRthe PASSENGER air bag OFF indicator lampon the center console is not lit(Y page 47)Rthe air bag control unit predicts a highimpact severity

The front air bags are not deployed in situa-tions where a low impact severity is predic-ted. You will then be protected by the fas-tened seat belt.

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys underneath thesteering column and front-passenger kneebag; underneath the glove box. Theydeploy together with the front air bags. Theyare designed to operate together with thefront air bags in frontal impacts if certainthresholds are exceeded. The knee bagsoperate at best in conjunction with correctlypositioned and fastened seat belts.Knee bags provide increased protection forthe driver and front passenger against the riskof:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the air bag deactivation system couldbe restricted. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a specialtear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,the side impact air bags cannot deploy cor-rectly and therefore cannot provide the inten-ded protection in the event of an accident.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outerseat cushions.When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection of the thorax for occu-pants on the front seats as well as also of thepelvis for the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs. How-ever, they do not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsThe side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accidentwith a high rate oflateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration,e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the Emergency Tension-ing DevicesRindependently of the front air bagsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. Side impactair bags are deployed if the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration or acceleration in alateral direction and determines that sideimpact air bag deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by the seatbelt.Side impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.

46 Occupant safetySafety

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side does not deploy under the fol-lowing conditions:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas-tened.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deployed inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.Window curtain air bags are deployed:Rat the start of an accidentwith a high rate oflateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration,e.g. in a side impactRon the side on which an impact occursRon the driver's side and passenger side, inthe event of a vehicle rollover and if thesystemdetermines that air bag deploymentcan offer the vehicle occupants additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the use of the seat belt

Rregardless of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags: will not deploy inthe event of impacts which do not exceed thesystem's preset deployment thresholds forvehicle acceleration/deceleration. You willthen be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

How the Occupant Classification Sys-tem works

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the front-passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself or her-self in the seat until the 45 indicatorlamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front-passenger front airbag deployment when the OCS has classifiedthe front-passenger seat occupant as weigh-ing as much as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint orif the front-passenger seat is classified asbeing empty.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started andremain illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat is classified as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remain illumi-nated, indicating that the front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified as

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

being heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted and then, depending on occupantweight sensor readings from the front-passenger seat, remain illuminated or go out.With the 45 indicator lamp illumina-ted, the front-passenger front air bag is deac-tivated. With the 45 indicator lampout, the front-passenger front air bag is acti-vated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a small individ-ual, the 45 indicator lamp will illumi-nate for approximately 6 seconds when theengine is started and then go out, indicatingthat the front-passenger front air bag is acti-vated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted and will not be deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp is not illumi-nated, the front-passenger front air bag isactivated and will be deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif impact exceeds a preset deploymentthresholdRindependently of the side impact air bagsIf the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will be influ-enced by:Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration asassessed by the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category asidentified by OCS

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children be

placed in the rear seats whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated and prop-erly secured in an appropriate infant restraint,toddler restraint, or booster seat recommen-ded for the size and weight of the child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchorsand Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the following impor-tant information when circumstances requireyou to place a child in the front-passengerseat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag tech-nology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,evenwith the air bag technology installed inyour vehicle. The only means to eliminatethis risk completely is never to place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore strongly rec-ommend that you always place a child in arear-facing child restraint on the rear seat.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45

48 Occupant safetySafety

indicator lampnot illuminate or go outwhilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure that the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated. If the 45 indi-cator lamp goes out or remains out, do nottransport a child on the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraint recommen-ded for the age, size and weight of thechild

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatman-ufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45 indica-tor lamp light up simultaneously, the OCS ismalfunctioning. The front passenger front airbag will be deactivated in this case. Have thesystem checked by qualified technicians assoon as possible. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in aposition that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should not posi-tion him/herself in such a way as to causethe passenger's weight to be lifted from the

seat cushion as this may result in the OCSbeing unable to correctly approximate thepassenger's weight category.RRead and observe all warnings in this chap-ter.

: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampIf the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp: does not light up.The Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor.The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted automatically for certain weight catego-ries.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampshows you the current status.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possiblewith their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorThe OCS weight sensor reading is affected ifthe occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. byleaning on the armrest.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have the nec-

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

essary repair work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.Both the driver and the front passengershould always observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication ofwhether or not the front passenger is posi-tioned correctly. Observe also the air bag dis-play messages that can be displayed in theinstrument cluster (Y page 225).If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by the weight of atypical child up to twelve months old,seated in a child restraint system.Ris occupied by a small individual, such as ayoung teenager or a small adult.Ris occupied by a child in a child restraintsystemwhoseweight is greater than that ofa typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCS deacti-vates the front-passenger front air bag. Deac-tivation takes place although the collision ful-fills the criteria for deploying the driver's airbag.For further information, see "Air bag displaymessages" (Y page 225).

System self-test

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does not illu-minate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

G WARNINGNever place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The undersideand rear side child restraint system must be

placed entirely on the seat cushion and thebackrest of the front-passenger seat back-rest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectlymounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of child restraint systems.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up:Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lockto position 1 or 2Rif an adult is seated properly on the front-passenger seat and the OCS classifies theoccupant as an adult

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampgoes out again after approximately six sec-onds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCSdetects that the front-passenger seat isempty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp will continue to light up. ThePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp willnot go out.For further information, see "Problems withthe Occupant Classification System"(Y page 51).

50 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the occupant classification system

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlights up and remainson.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of atypical adultRhas been determinedby the system not tobe a child

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, uprightposition.

X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 225).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or stays on.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child upto twelve months oldin a child restraintsystem

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint sys-tem are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If neces-sary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat beltbeing pulled too tightly.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off, havethe OCS checked immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat untilthe OCS has been repaired.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 225).

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat,do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Seat belts

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the eventof an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neck inju-ries, for example. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

G WARNINGSeat belts cannot protect as intended, if:Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or thebelt anchorage has been modified.

Damage caused to seat belts in an accidentmay not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.Modified or damaged seat belts can tear orfail, for example in the event of an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices maybe deployed unintentionally or fail to bedeployed when required. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Never modify seat belts, Emergency Tension-ing Devices, seat belt anchorages and inertiareels. Ensure that seat belts are not damagedor worn and are clean.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 56) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

Proper use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when used prop-erly. Never wear seat belts in any other waythan as described in this section, as thatcould result in serious injuries in the eventof an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat beltat all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, window curtain air bags forthe side windows), Emergency TensioningDevices, seat belt force limiters, and frontseat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance the pro-tection offered to properly belted occu-pants in certain frontal (front air bags, driv-er's side knee bag and ETDs) and side (sideimpact air bags, window curtain air bags,

52 Occupant safetySafety

and ETDs) impacts which exceed presetdeployment thresholds and in certain roll-overs (window curtain air bags and ETDs).RNever wear the shoulder belt under yourarm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm. Forthis purpose, you can adjust the height ofthe seat belt outlet.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across your abdo-men, it could cause serious injuries in acrash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or breaka-ble objects in or on your clothing, such aseyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these mightcause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fittedsnugly. Take special care of this whenwear-ing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than oneperson at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In acrash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use alap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.

RPlace the seat backrest in a position that isas upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to makesure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infantrestraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated and prop-erly secured in an appropriately sized childrestraint system or booster seat recommen-ded for the size and weight of the child. Foradditional information, see the "Children inthe vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 96).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sashguide:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-tion of the seat belt across the middle ofyour shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to theappropriate height (Y page 54).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts in the vehicle with the exceptionof the driver's seat belt are equipped with aspecial seat belt retractor, to which a childrestraint system can be secured. For furtherinformation on special seat belt retractors,see (Y page 59).Information on releasing the seat belt withrelease button? (Y page 54).

Belt height adjustment

You can adjust the seat belt height on thefront seats. Adjust the belt to a height thatallows the upper part of the seat belt to berouted across the center of your shoulder.X To raise: slide the belt guide upwards.The belt guide will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt guide release: andslide the belt guide downwards.

X Let go of belt guide release: in thedesired position and make sure that thebelt guide engages.

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

54 Occupant safetySafety

X Press release button? on belt buckle=.X Guide belt tongue; back to belt guide:.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerEvery time the engine is started, the 7seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec-onds. It lights up regardless of whether thedriver's and front-passenger seat belts havealready been fastened. If the driver's andfront-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lampthen goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftera maximum of six seconds or once the driv-er's seat belt is fastened.If after six seconds, the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed:Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains litas long as the driver's or front-passenger'sseat belt is not fastenedandRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) isexceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lampbegins to flash. A warning tone also soundswith increasing intensity for a maximum of

60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remains illu-minated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated. The 7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 243).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limiter

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! If the front-passenger seat is not occu-pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue inthe buckle on the front-passenger seat.Otherwise, the Emergency TensioningDevice could be triggered in the event of anaccident.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

The front seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rear are equipped with Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and seat belt force limiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat posi-tions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe restraint systems are operational; see"6 SRS warning lamp" (Y page 41)Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the beltbuckle of the respective front seat

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rearcompartment are triggered independently ofthe lock status of the seat belts.The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-sion if the vehicle decelerates or acceler-ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur-ing the initial stages of the impact.Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lat-eral direction on the side opposite to theimpact.Rin certain situations where the vehicle rollsover if the system determines that it canprovide additional protection.

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty for peo-ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. Toavoid this, you may wish to get out of thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You canalso open the window to allow fresh air toenter the vehicle interior. The6SRSwarn-ing lamp lights up.

If the seat belt is also equipped with a seatbelt force limiter and this is triggered, theforce exerted by the seat belt on the vehicleoccupant is reduced.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which absorb part of the deceleration force.This results in the force exerted on the occu-pant being distributed over a greater area.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position, chil-dren 12 years old and under must be seatedand properly secured in an appropriate infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the following impor-tant information when circumstances requireyou to place a child in the front passengerseat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag tech-nology designed to deactivate the front

56 Children in the vehicleSafety

passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12‑month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical12‑month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,evenwith the air bag technology installed inyour vehicle. The only means to completelyeliminate this risk is to never place a child ina rear-facing child restraint in the frontseat. We therefore strongly recommendthat you always place a child in a rear-facingchild restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing childrestraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation. Period-ically check the 4 5 indicator lampwhile driving to make sure the 4 5indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 45 indicator lamp goes out or remainsout, do not transport a child on the frontpassenger seat until the system has beenrepaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,

use the proper child restraint recommen-ded for the age, size andweight of the child,and secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seat man-ufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.

Children in the vehicle 57

Safety

Z

Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck. A boosterseat may be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecom-ing a projectile in the event of an accident.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:RSecure the child with a child or infant seatrestraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.RMake sure that the infant or child is prop-erly secured at all times while the vehicle isin motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children with achild or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territories

58 Children in the vehicleSafety

Rthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and childrenmust always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.All infant or child restraint systemsmustmeetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior or on the infant or child restraint.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf you release the seat belt when driving, thespecial seat belt retractor is deactivated.The released seat belt cannot be engagedagain while driving, because the inertia reelpulls in the seat belt a small distance. Thechild restraint system is no longer properlysecured. There is an increased risk of seriousinjury or even fatal injury.Always keep the seat belt of the activatedspecial seat belt retractor engaged when driv-ing.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retrac-tor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken

once the child restraint system has beensecured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seatbelt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-ing the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button andguide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger front air bag is notdeactivated:Ra child secured in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat could be seri-ously or even fatally injured by the front-passenger air bag deploying. This is espe-cially a risk if the child is in the immediatevicinity of the front-passenger air bag whenit deploys.Rnever secure a child on the front-passengerseat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

tem. Only secure a rearward-facing childrestraint system on a suitable rear seat.Rand you secure a forward-facing childrestraint system to the front-passengerseat, you must move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible.When doing so,ensure that the shoulder belt strap from thebelt outlet on the vehicle is routed towardsthe front to the shoulder belt guide on thechild restraint system. Set the belt heightadjustment so that the belt strap is routedtowards the front along the bottom.

The front-passenger air bag is not deactiva-ted:Ron vehicles without an air bag deactivationsystem on the front-passenger seat.Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivationsystem on the front-passenger seat, unlessa child restraint system with transpondersfor an air bag deactivation system is instal-led on the front-passenger seat.Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivationsystem on the front-passenger seat, if the4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is not lit.

To make you aware of this danger, a corre-sponding warning sticker has been affixed tothe side of the dashboard and on both sides ofthe sun visor on the front-passenger side.Information about recommended childrestraint systems is available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor

Warning symbol for a rearward-facing childrestraint system

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraintsystem on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURYto the CHILD can occur.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

When installing a child restraint system, besure to observe the manufacturer's installa-tion instructions and the instructions for cor-rect use of the child restraint system.

! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt for the center seat does not gettrapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could bedamaged.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings:. Comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer'sinstructions when installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized secur-ing system for specially designed childrestraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings: for twoLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsare installed on the left and right of the rearseats.Non LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

Top Tether

Important safety notesG WARNINGAlways engage the rear seat backrests in anupright position before installing the TopTether belt. Push and pull the rear seat backr-ests to check whether they are engaged cor-rectly. If the seat backrest is not locked prop-erly, the seat backrest could fold. The childseat would no longer be supported properly orpositioned to provide its intended benefit.That could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

Example: Top Tether belt with one belt strap

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system secured with LATCH-type(ISOFIX) and the rear seat. This helps reducethe risk of injury even further. If the childrestraint system is installed with Top Tether,this should always be used.The Top Tether anchorage points are installedin the rear compartment behind the outerhead restraints on the parcel shelf.There is also another Top Tether anchoragepoint behind the central rear seat.X Press down the rear of cover; in thedirection of the arrow.Cover; is raised slightly at the front.

X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X TopTether beltwith onebelt strap: routeTop Tether beltA centrally over headrestraint:.

X Top Tether belt with two belt straps:route Top Tether beltsA on the left andright past the side of head restraint:.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

X Hook Top Tether hook? into Top Tetheranchorage=.

X Make sure that Top Tether beltA is nottwisted.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so. Make sure that Top TetherbeltA is tight.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can activate the following child-prooflocks:Rrear doors (Y page 62)Rrear side windows (Y page 63)

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in serious inju-ries or an accident. Therefore, when childrenride in the rear always secure the rear doorswith the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When the

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

vehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

X To activate/deactivate: press button:.If indicator lamp; is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in the driv-er's door. If indicator lamp; is off, oper-ation is possible using the switches in therear compartment.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 63)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 64)

RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distancewarning function and adaptive BrakeAssist) (Y page 64)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 64)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 67)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 71)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 71)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 71)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safety sys-tems can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. Drivingsafety systems are merely aids designed toassist driving. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speedand for braking in good time. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road,weather and traffic conditions and maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in front. Drivecarefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Pay particular attention tothe information regarding tires, recommen-ded minimum tire tread depths etc. in the"Wheels and tires" section (Y page 314).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-ing safety systems described in this sectionwork as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.

Driving safety systems 63

Safety

Z

This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 245) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 214).ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery roads, even ifyou only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists ofthe Adaptive Brake Assist and the distancewarning function, which are described in thefollowing.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

64 Driving safety systemsSafety

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate the distance warning function in theon-board computer (Y page 205).

If the distance warning function is activated,theÄ symbol appears in the assistancegraphics display.The distancewarning function can help you tominimize the risk of a collision with a vehicleahead or reduce the effects of such a colli-sion. If the distance warning function detectsthat there is a risk of a collision, you will bewarned visually and acoustically. Withoutyour intervention, the distance warning func-tion cannot prevent a collision.Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),the distance warning function warns you ifyou rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound,

and the· distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of about 40mph (70 km/h), thedistance warning function can also react tostationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will initially alert you both visuallyand acoustically.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicleRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 140).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

Z

sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-vene.Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking dur-ing hazardous situations at speeds above4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensorsystem to evaluate the traffic situation.With the help of a sensor system, adaptiveBrake Assist can detect obstacles that are inthe path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.

Should you approach an obstacle and Adap-tive Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-sion, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a rear-endcollision. Should you apply the brakes vigo-rously, Adaptive Brake Assist will automati-cally increase the braking force to a level suit-able for the traffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: if adaptive BrakeAssist requires particularly high brake pres-sure, preventative passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are deployed simul-taneously.Up to vehicle speeds of around 250 km/h,adaptive BrakeAssist is capable of reacting tomoving objects that have already been rec-ognized as such at least once over the periodof observation. Adaptive Brake Assist doesnot react to stationary obstacles.Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been recognized as such at least onceover the period of observation. AdaptiveBrake Assist does not react to stationaryobstacles.If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rain

66 Driving safety systemsSafety

Rthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicleRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 140).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

General informationCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isonly available on vehicles with DISTRONIC.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSextends the functionality of COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST with an automatic brakingfunction. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS can help you to minimize the risk of afront-end collision with a vehicle ahead orreduce the effects of such a collision. If COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detectsthat there is a risk of a collision, you will bewarned visually and acoustically. In criticalsituations COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS also initiates automatic braking.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS in the on-board computer(Y page 206).

If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isactivated, theÄ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.If the driver's seat belt is fastened, COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can brake

automatically within a speed range ofbetween 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph(200 km/h).COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canalso react to stationary obstacles with auto-matic braking within a speed range ofbetween 4 mph (7 km/h) and 19 mph(30 km/h).In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicleRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 140).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified to

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

keep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.ETS brakes the drive wheels individually ifthey spin. This enables you to pull away andaccelerate on slippery surfaces, for exampleif the road surface is slippery on one side. Inaddition, more drive torque is transferred tothe wheel or wheels with traction.ETS remains active when you deactivateESP®.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! When testing the electric parking brakeon a braking dynamometer, switch off theignition. Application of the brakes by ESP®may otherwise destroy the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the igni-tion when the electric parking brake isbeing tested on a brake dynamometer.Application of the brakes by ESP®may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance tests may only be carried out ona 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operatethe vehicle on such a dynamometer, pleaseconsult a qualified workshop. You couldotherwise damage the drive train or thebrake system.

! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with thefront or rear axle raised.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing yourvehicle with the front axle raised, it is impor-tant that you observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 309).Vehicles with 4MATIC: when towing yourvehicle with both axles on the ground, it isimportant that you observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 309).ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFFwarning lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup continuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the åESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 247) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 214).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine starts automati-

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

callywhen the driverwants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus.Example: if ESP®was deactivated beforethe engine was switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)

Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer.X To deactivate:(Y page 205).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate:(Y page 205).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 63).

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon designated roads when the vehicle'sown oversteering and understeering char-acteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

The SPORT handling modeSPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷ OFFOFFmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ESP® ONONmessage appears in themultifunc-tion display.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.Rengine torque is only restricted to a limiteddegree, and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no lon-ger available; nor is it activated if you brakefirmly with assistance from ESP®.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationIf your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation.ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking andlimiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailercombination) begins to lurch, you can onlystabilize the vehicle/trailer combination bydepressing the brake firmly.ESP® trailer stabilization is active abovespeeds of about 40 mph (65 km/h).

ESP® trailer stabilization does not work ifESP® is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunction.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa-ses the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 245) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 216).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 176) andhill start assist (Y page 142). For furtherinformation, see Driving tips (Y page 162).

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steering

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

wheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided in partic-ular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are ona wet or slippery road surface when youbrake.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notesNo steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is malfunctioning.Rthe lighting is faulty.Power steering will, however, continue tofunction.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate: remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the Smart-Key.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Rthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRa doorRthe trunk lidRthe hoodX To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

72 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies the Cus-tomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-vice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

Theft deterrent locking system 73

Safety

Z

74

Useful information .............................. 76SmartKey ............................................. 76Doors .................................................... 81Trunk .................................................... 84Side windows ...................................... 86Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ........................................ 90

75

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press button=.

If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armedagain.

76 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

X To lock centrally: press button:.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.

i When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 208).

i You can also set an audible signal to con-firm that the vehicle has been locked. Theaudible signal can be activated and deacti-vated using the on-board computer(Y page 209).

X To open the trunk lid automatically:press and hold button; until the trunk lidopens (Y page 85).

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. When you then unlock the vehicleonly the driver's door and the fuel filler flapare unlocked. This is useful if you frequentlytravel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp (Y page 78)flashes twice.i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of the vehi-cle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 78).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 72).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey 77

Openingandclosing

Z

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 83)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 86)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 83)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely intothe SmartKey until it engages, and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 78).

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 77).

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of the

78 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

arrow until battery tray cover: opens.When doing so, do not hold cover: shut.

X Remove battery tray cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover:and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 77).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

SmartKey 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote controlfunction of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary(Y page 78).

X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote controlfunction of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% /& button.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 301).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 305).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The steering lock is mechanically blocked.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.Whiledoing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe the load-ing guidelines (Y page 256).

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insidei When a door is opened, the side windowon that side opens slightly. When the dooris closed, the side window closes again.

! The side windows will not open/close ifthe battery is discharged or if the side win-dows have iced up. It will then not be pos-sible to close the door. Do not attempt toforce the door closed. You could otherwisedamage the door or the side window.

Doors 81

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock and open a front door: pulldoor handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob:.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can open therear doors from inside the vehicle unless theyare secured by the child-proof lock(Y page 62).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 72).

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This can be useful if you wishto lock the vehicle before pulling away, forexample.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors and the trunk lid are closed,the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can open therear doors from inside the vehicle unless theyare secured by the child-proof lock(Y page 62).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 72).If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the lockingbutton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the insideis unlocked.

82 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Automatic locking feature

X To disarm: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To arm: press and hold button; for aboutfive seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and donot hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 209).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 72).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 77).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 77).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 82).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 77).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

Doors 83

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 77).

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 353).

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the cargo compartment. Observe the load-ing guidelines (Y page 256).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.The trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRunlocked from inside with the mechanicalkey

Opening/closing manually from out-side

OpeningX Press the% button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.

84 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Closing

X Pull down the trunk lid using handle:.X Let the trunk lid drop into the lock.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the&button on the SmartKey.

Opening automatically from outside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 353).

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the handle in the trunklid.

X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

Opening automatically from inside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 353).

Opening

You can open the trunk lid from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.X To open: pull remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

Trunk 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Emergency releaseIf the trunk lid can no longer be opened fromoutside the vehicle, use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the trunk lid.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 353).

You can reach the emergency release via thetrunk. Fold the rear backrests forward(Y page 260).

X Insert suitable tool;, e.g. a screwdriver,horizontally on the left-hand side into emer-gency release slot:.

X Push tool; evenly in the direction of thearrow and open the trunk lid.

i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 83),the trunk is also locked.

Emergency release buttonYou can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and openedwith the trunk lid emergency release whenthe vehicle is stationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does notopen the trunk lid if the battery is disconnec-ted or discharged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-

86 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window from trav-eling upwards during the automatic closingprocess, the side window opens again auto-matically. During themanual closing process,the side window only opens again automati-cally after the corresponding switch isreleased. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is no substitute for your atten-tion when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

i When the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 63), the sidewindows cannot be operated from the rear.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To openmanually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To closemanually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation:press/pull the corresponding switch again.i If you press/pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Side windows 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Convenience openingYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functions simultane-ously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the panorama sunroofare in the desired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.

i The SmartKey must be close to the driv-er's door handle.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again untilthe roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset each side window if:Rthe side window opens again slightly afterbeing closed fully.Rthe side window can no longer be fullyopened or closed.

X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 87).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

88 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 87).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly. Ifthis is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.

Side windows 89

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and you can-not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roofwith power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

90 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-matically lowers slightly at the rear. This couldtrap you or other persons. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that nobody reaches intothe sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, immediatelypull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-ing sunroof lifts during opening.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise,malfunctionsmayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicle inte-rior.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition tothe usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. The automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and is no substitute foryour attention when closing the sliding roof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Make sure that the roller sunblinds areopen.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 91

Openingandclosing

Z

i If you press/pull the3 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic opera-tion is started in the corresponding direc-tion. You can stop automatic operation bypressing/pulling the switch again.Automatic operation for raising is availableonly when the sliding sunroof is closed.

i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

Rain-closing featureThe raised sliding sunroof automatically low-ers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain.The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on:Rthe road speed andRthe intensity of the rain.You can manually cancel the automatic clos-ing procedure. Press or pull the3 switchin any direction.To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the3 switch in direction:. The rain-closingfeature remains activated.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thesliding sunroof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thesliding sunroof is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a roller sunblind during theclosing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

92 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.i If you press/pull the3 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic opera-tion is started in the corresponding direc-tion. You can stop automatic operation bypressing/pulling the switch again.

i After opening the sliding sunroof, theroller sunblind closes slightly automati-cally. This reduces drafts in the vehicle inte-rior.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblindsIf the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds donot move smoothly, reset the sliding sunroofand the roller sunblinds:X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof(Y page 91) and the roller sunblinds(Y page 93) can be fully opened and closedagain.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then thebacking up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased ormaximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This posesan increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the3switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the3switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-ture.

94 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

Useful information .............................. 96Correct driver's seat position ............ 96Seats .................................................... 97Steering wheel .................................. 102Mirrors ............................................... 103Memory functions ............................. 105

95

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-ment (Y page 97).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop-erly.Manual seat adjustment (Y page 98)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 99)When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-tion.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to analmost vertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle sothat your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.

X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly (Y page 99).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 102).X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel(Y page 102)When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steeringwheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly.

Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 52).X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 53).

96 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across thehip joints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103) insuch a way that you have a good view ofroad and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat and exterior mirror settings(Y page 105).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.

While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12

Seats 97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

years old and under must be seated and prop-erly secured in an appropriately sized childrestraint system or booster seat recommen-ded for the size and weight of the child. Foradditional information, see the "Children inthe vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

i Further related subjects:Rcargo compartment enlargement (fold-ing down the rear seats) (Y page 259)

Adjusting the seats manually

Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Lift handle: and slide the seat forwardsor backwards.

X Release lever: again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Backrest angleX Relieve the pressure on the backrest.X Turn handwheel? forwards or backwards.

Seat heightX Pull handle= upwards or push it downrepeatedly until the seat has reached thedesired height.

Seat cushion angleAdjust the angle so that your thighs are lightlysupported.X Turn handwheel; forwards or backwards.

98 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height1; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 105).

Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the head

restraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

General notesFor vehicles with sports seats you cannotadjust the front head restraints or the outerrear head restraints.

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of thehead restraint

1 Not available on vehicles with sports seats.

Seats 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back ofthe seat occupant's head.X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages.There are several notches.

X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button: and push the headrestraint backwards.

X When the head restraint is in the desiredposition, release the button and make surethat the head restraint is engaged in posi-tion.

Adjusting the height of the headrestraints electricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 99) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow .

Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

AMG Performance SeatTo adjust the contour of the seat and forimproved lateral support, you can individuallyadjust the front seats.2

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seatcushionX To set the side bolsters of the seatcushion narrower: press button:.

X To set the side bolsters of the seatcushion wider: press button;.

2 Only in conjunction with electrically adjustable seats.

100 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the seat backrest side bol-stersX To set the side bolsters of the seatbackrest narrower: press button=.

X To set the side bolsters of the seatbackrest wider: press button?.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Seats 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating willswitch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

102 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.After the engine has been started, the exte-rior mirrors are automatically heated at lowoutside temperatures. Heating takes a maxi-mum of ten minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectricallyThis function is only available in Canada.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

Mirrors 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsThis function is only available in Canada.If the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-rors when locking" function in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 210).X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in Canada.If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 210):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding

button (Y page 103) until you hear a clickand then the mirrors engage in position.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 103).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function isonly available if the vehicle is equipped withthe "Mirrors package".The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

General notesThe "Parking position of the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side" function is onlyavailable if the vehicle is equipped with the"Mirrors package".

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gearYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.

104 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror. You should see the rearwheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side with the corresponding but-ton (Y page 103).

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-gaged reverse gearRif you press button: for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory functions

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seat,you and other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.

Memory functions 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat. If somebodybecomes trapped, immediately release thememory function position button. The adjust-ment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 99).X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver'sside (Y page 103).

X Briefly press the M memory button andthen press storage position button1,2 or3within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat andexterior mirrors are in the stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

106 Memory functionsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information ............................ 108Exterior lighting ................................ 108Interior lighting ................................. 113Replacing bulbs ................................. 114Windshield wipers ............................ 118

107

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When using sym-metrical lights, the edge of the road is not litas widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back to asym-metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible aftercrossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 110)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 208)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampC N Fog lamp (only vehicles with front

fog lamps)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0.

108 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-vated the daytime running lamps functionvia the on-board computer, the daytimerunning lamps or the low-beam headlampsand parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawin Canada.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.

If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Front fog lampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve vis-ibility aswell asmaking it easier for other roadusers to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the parking lamps or togetherwith the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps.X To switch on the front fog lamps: turnthe SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the N button.The greenN indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The greenN indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps are equip-ped with the "fog lamp" function; informationon the fog lamp function for vehicles withIntelligent Light System (Y page 112).

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-

Exterior lighting 109

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

i When the rear fog lamp is switched on,the center brake lamp in the tail lampswitches off due to a legal requirement.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The greenT indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch backto its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

110 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive HighbeamAssist is active, itcontrols activation of the high-beam head-lamps (Y page 112).

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-ing light function can only be activated whenthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above45 mph (70 km/h) or switch off the turn sig-nal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead positionThe cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Exterior lighting 111

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Extended range fog lamps

The extended range fog lamps reduce theglare experienced by the driver and improvethe illumination of the edge of the road.Active: if you are driving at speeds below40mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rearfog lamp.Not active: if, following activation, you aredriving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h)or if you switch off the rear fog lamp.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the head-lamps to change between low beam and highbeam automatically. The system recognizesvehicles with their lights on, either approach-ing from the opposite direction or traveling infront of your vehicle, and consequentlyswitches the headlamps from high beam tolow beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-tivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.

112 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up when it is dark and thelight sensor activates the low-beam head-lamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no otherroad users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other roadusers have been detected or the roads areadequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c To switch the front interior lighting

on= v To switch the on/off? | To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p To switch the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/offB To switch the automatic interior lighting

control on

Interior lighting 113

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

: p To switch the left-hand reading lampon/off

; p To switch the right-hand readinglamp on/off

Interior lighting control

Important notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The brightness of the ambient lightingmay beset using the on-board computer(Y page 208).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on: set the switch to centerpositionB.

X To switch off: set the switch to the |position.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 209).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on:set the switch to the c position.

X To switch the interior lighting off: set theswitch to the| position or (if the door isclosed) to the center position.

X To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using thekey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.

114 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contactwith liquids.There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make sure

that these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W; Low-beam headlamp/daytime running

lamp/parking lamp/standing lamp:H15 55 W/15 W

= Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Replacing bulbs 115

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps): Rear fog lamp: P 21 W; Brake lamp: W 16 W= Brake lamp: W 16 W? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 WA Backup lamp: W 16 W

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in thefront wheel housingYou must remove the cover from the frontwheel housing before you can change thefront bulbs.

X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Turn rotary knob: through 90°.Cover; is released.

X Push cover; down.X To install: push cover; up.X Turn rotary knob: through 90°.Cover; is locked.

Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-lamps)

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 116).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 116).

High-beam headlamps/daytime run-ning lamps/parking lamps/standinglamps (vehicles with halogen head-lamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.

116 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb; counter-clockwise and pull itout.

X Insert the new bulb and engage it to thestop.

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

Turn signals (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder:.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:.X Insert bulb holder: and turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.

Cornering light function (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-elsYoumust open the side trim panel in the trunkbefore you can change the bulbs in the taillamps.

Example: right-hand side trim panelX To open: release right or left side trimpanel: at the top and fold it down in thedirection of the arrow.

X To close: insert side panel :.

Tail lampX Switch off the lights.X Open the trunk.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 117).

Replacing bulbs 117

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Press retaining clips: at the same time inthe direction of the arrows.

X Carefully remove the bulb holder with thecontacted connectors and the bulbs.

Bulb holder: Brake lamp; Brake lamp= Rear fog lamp? Backup LightA Turn signalX Brake lamp/rear fog lamp/backuplamp: remove the corresponding bulb fromthe bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Turn signal lamp: lightly press the bulbinto the bulb holder, turn it counter-clock-wise and remove it from bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage onretaining clips:.

X Close the side trim panel (Y page 117).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î Towipe thewind-

shield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

118 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-shield becomes dirty in dry weather condi-tions, the windshield wipers may be activa-ted inadvertently. This could then damagethe windshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriate wiping fre-quency is automatically set according to theintensity of the rain. In the Å position, therain sensor is more sensitive than in the Äposition, causing the windshield wipers towipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, the

windshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.

Installing the wiper blades

Windshield wipers 119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Position newwiper blade:with recessBon lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

120 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of the wind-shield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Windshield wipers 121

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

122

Useful information ............................ 124Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 124Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 129Setting the air vents ......................... 136

123

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

The climate control/dual-zone automaticcontrol regulates the temperature and thehumidity of the vehicle interior and filters outundesirable substances from the air.Climate control/dual-zone automatic climatecontrol is only operational when the engine isrunning. Optimum operation is only achievedwith the side windows and panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel closed.The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 135).Always keep the ventilation flaps behind theside trim panel in the cargo compartmentclear (Y page 117). Otherwise the vehicle willnot be ventilated correctly.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 88). Thiswill speed up the cooling process and thedesired interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. With dual-zone automaticclimate control, gaseous pollutants andodors will also be reduced. A clogged filterreduces the amount of air supplied to thevehicle interior. For this reason, you shouldalways observe the interval for replacingthe filter, which is specified in the Mainte-nance Booklet. As it depends on environ-mental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution,the interval may be shorter than stated inthe Maintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that the residual heat func-tionmay be activated automatically an hourafter the SmartKey has been removed inorder to dry the air-conditioning system.The vehicle is then ventilated for30 minutes.

124 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for climate control

USA only: To set the temperature (Y page 131); To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)= To set the air distribution (Y page 132)? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)A To set the airflow (Y page 132)B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)

Canada only: To set the temperature (Y page 131); To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)= To set the air distribution (Y page 132)

Overview of climate control systems 125

Climatecontrol

? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)A To set the airflow (Y page 132)B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)

Optimum use of climate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains notes and recommen-dations on optimum use of climate control.RSwitch on the air-conditioning system byturning control knobA clockwise to thedesired position (except position 0).RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).RRecommendation for avoiding mistedwindows at low exterior temperaturesor in rain: switch on the¿ cooling withdehumidification function (Y page 129).Set air distribution to¯ and if possibleswitch offP andO (Y page 132).In air-recirculation mode, switche off(Y page 135).Set airflow controlA to a setting between3 and 6 (Y page 132).RRecommendation for rapid cooling orheating of the vehicle interior: briefly setairflow controlA to a setting between 3and 6 (Y page 132).RRecommendation for a constant vehi-cle interior temperature: set airflow con-trolA to a setting between 1 and 3(Y page 132).RRecommendation for air distribution inthe winter: setO and¯(Y page 132).Recommendation for air distribution inthe summer: setP orP and¯(Y page 132).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors or

when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RVehicleswithCOMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, theclimate status display appears for threeseconds at the bottom of the screen in theCOMAND display. See also the separateCOMAND operating instructions. You willsee the current settings of the various cli-mate control functions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 144).

126 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 131); To set climate control to automatic (Y page 131)= To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)? To increase the airflow (Y page 132)A To set the air distribution (Y page 132)B DisplayC To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 129)E To set the temperature, right (Y page 131)F To activate/deactivate maximum cooling (Y page 133)G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)H To reduce the airflow (Y page 132)I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)

Overview of climate control systems 127

Climatecontrol

Canada only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 131); To set climate control to automatic (Y page 131)= To defrost the windshield (Y page 133)? To increase the airflow (Y page 132)A To set the air distribution (Y page 132)B DisplayC To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 135)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 129)E To set the temperature, right (Y page 131)F To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 135)G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 129)H To reduce the airflow (Y page 132)I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 132)

Notes on using dual-zone automaticclimate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the mostout of your dual-control automatic climatecontrol.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side as well. The indi-cator lamp in theá button goes out.

128 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

ROnly available on vehicles for Canada:use the residual heat function if youwant toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residualheat function can only be activated or deac-tivated with the ignition switched off.RVehicleswithCOMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, theclimate status display appears for threeseconds at the bottom of the screen in theCOMAND display. See also the separateCOMAND operating instructions. You willsee the current settings of the various cli-mate control functions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 144).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

Climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To switch on: turn controlA clockwise tothe desired position (except position 0)(Y page 125).

X To switch off: turn controlA counter-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 125).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

i Dual-zone automatic climate control:switch on climate control primarily usingtheà button.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, onlydeactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-cation" function briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Operating the climate control systems 129

Climatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

130 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation" function cannotbe switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesThe automatic function is only available inconjunctionwith dual-zone automatic climatecontrol.In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, onlydeactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-cation" function briefly.

Setting climate control to automaticX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To switch to manual mode: press theÉ orË button.

orX Press theK orI button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Setting the temperature

Climate controlYou can set the temperature for the entirevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To increase/reduce: turn control:clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125). Only change the temperaturesetting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To increase/reduce: turn control: orEclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 127). Only change the temperaturesetting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).

Operating the climate control systems 131

Climatecontrol

Setting the air distribution

Climate control

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

vents

i You can also activate several air distribu-tion settings simultaneously. To do this,press multiple air distribution buttons. Theair is then directed through various vents.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Press one or more of theP,O,¯buttons.The corresponding indicator lamp lights upbriefly.

Dual-zone automatic climate control

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsb Directs air through the defroster, cen-

ter and side air ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed if the adjusters are turned clockwiseuntil they engage.

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Press theÉ orË button repeatedlyuntil the desired symbol appears in the dis-play.

Setting the airflow

Climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To increase/reduce: turn controlAclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To increase/reduce: press theK orI button.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available with dual-zoneautomatic climate control.X To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside.

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passengerside.

132 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-shield and the side windows.

i You should only select the "Windshielddefrosting" function until the windshield isclear again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode offi The "Windshield defrosting" functionautomatically sets the blower output to theoptimum defrosting effect. As a result, theairflow may increase or decrease automat-ically after the button is pressed.

i You can adjust the blower output man-ually while the "Windshield defrosting"function is in operation:RClimate control: turn airflow controlAclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125).RDual-zone automatic climate control:press theó orô button.

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Dual-zone automatic climate control: presstheà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Climate control: turn temperature con-trol: clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125).Dual-zone automatic climate control: turntemperature control: orE clockwise orcounter-clockwise (Y page 127).

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÙ buttonagain.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-trol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

Climate controlX Activate the¿ "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Operating the climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Activate the¿ "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Set the air distribution toP orO.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

134 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside the vehi-cle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To activate: press thee button.The indicator lamp in thee button lightsup.

i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-matically at high outside temperatures.When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp in thee button is not lit. Outside air is addedafter about 30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press thee button.The indicator lamp in thee button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-side temperatures below approximately41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if the"Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at out-side temperatures above approximately41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function is activated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesThe residual heat function is only available invehicles for Canada with dual-zone automaticclimate control.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the vehiclefor approximately 30minutes after the enginehas been switched off. The heating timedepends on the set interior temperature.

i The blower will run at a low speed regard-less of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

Operating the climate control systems 135

Climatecontrol

i You cannot use the ventilation to cool thevehicle interior to a temperature lower thanthe outside temperature.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock or remove it (Y page 141).

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button goesout.

i Residual heat is deactivated automati-cally:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i You can move the adjusters for the airvents vertically or horizontally to set thedirection of the airflow.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,open the air vents completely and set theadjusters to the central position.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents: coun-ter-clockwise.

X To close the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents: clock-wise as far as it will go.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air ventX To open a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; counter-clockwise.

X To close a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; clockwise as far as it willgo.

136 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheelX To open/close: turn thumbwheel= up ordown.i If the control panel in the front is switchedoff, no air can flow through the rear airvents.

Setting the air vents 137

Climatecontrol

Z

138

Useful information ............................ 140Notes onbreaking-in a newvehicle............................................................. 140Driving ............................................... 140Automatic transmission ................... 146Refueling ............................................ 155Parking ............................................... 157Driving tips ........................................ 160Driving systems ................................ 166

139

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and driv-ing safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a certain distance is being driven afterthe vehicle has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full system effectiveness is notreached until the end of this teach-in proce-dure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the redarea of the tachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),drive in program E.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-cles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking-in if the engine or parts of thedrive train on your vehicle have beenreplaced.

i Always observe the respective speed lim-its.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

140 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operationand engine speeds greater than 5000 rpmwhen the engine is cold. This helps to pro-tect the engine and avoids uncomfortabledriving.

Key positions

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-Key for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials in

Driving 141

Drivingandparking

Z

the engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

i During a cold start, the engine runs athigher speeds to enable the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperature.The sound of the enginemay change duringthis time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

i When the transmission is in position N,you can also start the engine with the brakepedal depressed.

Starting procedureX Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then canthe parking lock be deactivated. If you donot depress the brake pedal, the DIRECTSELECT lever can still be moved but theparking lock remains engaged.

i At transmission fluid temperatures belowÒ4 ‡ (Ò20†), you can only shift out of parkposition P into another transmission posi-tion when the engine is running.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The electric parking brake is automaticallyreleased (Y page 158).The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automatic lock-ing feature (Y page 209).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.

142 DrivingDrivingandparking

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.Further information on holding the vehiclestationary on uphill gradients (Y page 149).

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayIf the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stop

function switches the engine off automati-cally if the vehicle stops moving.The stop/start function is automatically acti-vated each time you start the engine with theSmartKey.If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 144) or a malfunc-tion has caused the system to be deactivated,the¤ symbol is not displayed.AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop functionis only available in drive program C.

Automatic engine switch-off

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is operationaland the¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off are fulfilled, the¤ symbol isshown in yellow.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stopped auto-matically.

i The engine can be switched off automat-ically a maximum of four times (first stopand three subsequent stops) in succession.The¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display after the engine has

Driving 143

Drivingandparking

Z

been started automatically for the fourthtime. When the¤ symbol is shown ingreen in the multifunction display, auto-matic engine switch-off is again possible.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automaticstop phase. When you depress the accel-erator pedal, the engine starts automati-cally and the braking effect of the HOLDfunction is deactivated.

Automatic engine start

General notesThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe charge level of the battery is too low.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if you:Rrelease the brake pedal in transmissionposition D or N when the HOLD function isnot active.Rdepress the accelerator pedal.Rmove the transmission out of position P.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; and the¤ symbol inthe multifunction display go out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 143) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in the mul-tifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 143) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-tifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated man-ually or as the result of a malfunction. Theengine will then not be switched off auto-matically when the vehicle stops.

144 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 176) or DISTRONICPLUS (Y page 168).

X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 305).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 145

Drivingandparking

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

The coolant tempera-ture display is showingmore than 248 ‡(120 †). The coolantwarning lamp may alsobe lit and a warningtone may sound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 285). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positionsAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles): theDIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.For information on the selector lever in AMGvehicles (Y page 148).

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The current trans-mission position P, R,N orD appears in the

146 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

transmission position display (Y page 147)in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into which transmis-sion positions you can change using theDIRECT SELECT lever.

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should select trans-mission position D and drive program E orS.

Engaging park position PX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-tion of arrow P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

i When you engage park position P, makesure that the transmission position displayshows P in the multifunction display.

i You can only engage park positionPwhenthe vehicle is stationary.

i The automatic transmission shifts intopark position P automatically:Rif you open the driver's door while thevehicle is stationary in transmission posi-tion D or RRif you open the door while traveling atvery low speeds in transmission positionD or R

In addition, a warning tone sounds and adisplay message is shown.

i Depressing the brake and pushing theDIRECT SELECT lever up or down disen-gages the parking lock. The transmission isin N neutral.At transmission fluid temperatures belowÒ4 ‡ (Ò20†), you can only shift out of parkposition P into another transmission posi-tion when the engine is running.In order to shift from park position Pdirectly into R or D:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up ordown past the first point of resistance

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-cle is moving, do not shift the automatictransmission directly fromD to R, from R toD or directly to P. The automatic transmis-sion could otherwise be damaged.

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.

i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-able when reverse gear is engaged.Further information on the ECO start/stopfunction (Y page 143).

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

Automatic transmission 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Shifting to neutral NX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

If the engine has been switched off, the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts to N.

Remaining in neutral NIf the automatic transmission is to remain inneutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in carwashes with a towing device, please observethe following instructions:

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

Selector lever

Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P buttonj Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

Example: Transmission position display; Drive program displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

148 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Engaging park position P

X When the vehicle is stationary, press P but-ton:.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P (Y page 157) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake in addi-tion to the parking lock in order tosecure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics are mal-functioning, the transmission maybe locked in position P.Have the vehicle electronicschecked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission to posi-tion N if the vehicle is in danger ofskidding, e.g. on icy roads.When you switch off the engine, theautomatic transmission automati-cally shifts into neutral N.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gearshift-ing behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 150)Rthe position of the accelerator pedal(Y page 149)Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

Holding the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients

G WARNINGIf the clutch overheats, the electronic man-agement system is automatically deactivated.

Automatic transmission 149

Drivingandparking

Z

This interrupts the power transmission. Thevehicle may, for example, roll backwards ongradients. There is a risk of an accident.Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the accelerator.

The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehi-cle stationary on uphill gradients by depress-ing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch over-heats, a warning tone sounds.All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): theStopStop VehicleVehicle ShiftShift toto PP LeaveLeave EngineEngineRunningRunning displaymessage appears in themul-tifunction display. You will only be able tocontinue your journey once the clutch hascooled down and the display message in themultifunction display has disappeared.AMG vehicles: the Trans. Oil Overhea‐Trans. Oil Overhea‐ted Drive on with Careted Drive on with Care display messageappears in the multifunction display.Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphillgradients by depressing the accelerator.Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationaryon uphill gradients by:Rdepressing the brake pedalRactivating the HOLD functionRengaging the electric parking brake

KickdownAMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kick-down in temporary manual drive program M.For further information on manual drive pro-gram M (Y page 152).Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengearsD and Rmay help to free the vehicle if ithas become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-cle's engine management system limits thespeed to amaximum of 5mph (9 km/h) whenshifting back and forth. To shift back and forthbetween transmission positions D and R,move the DIRECT SELECT selector lever upand down past the point of resistance.

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between drive programs with differ-ent driving characteristics.

Example: program selector button

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Only change from automatic drive program Eor S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.X Press program selector button: repeat-edly until the letter for the desired gearshiftprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.

150 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program E each time theengine is started.

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 151).

AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Only change from automatic drive program Cor S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.X Press program selector button: repeat-edly until the letter for the desired gearshiftprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program C each time theengine is started.

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 151).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left steering wheel paddle shifter (shiftsdown)

; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (shiftsup)

In drive program M, you can change gearyourself using the steeringwheel paddle shift-ers.If you pull the left or right steering wheel pad-dle shifter when in automatic drive program E(drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S, theautomatic transmission shifts into drive pro-gram M for a limited time. Depending onwhich paddle shifter is pulled, the automatictransmission immediately shifts into the nextgear down or up.AMG vehicles: you can activate drive pro-gram M RACE START (Y page 177) using thesteering wheel paddle shifters.

i You can only change gear with the steer-ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-mission is in position D.

i For further information on the manualdrive program, see (Y page 152).

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on MAGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine settingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner

Automatic transmission 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rsporty engine settingsRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points

Manual drive program

IntroductionIn manual drive program M, you can changegear yourself by using the steering wheel pad-dle shifters. For this, the transmission mustbe in position D. The gear currently selectedand engaged is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.Manual drive program M differs from driveprograms E (drive program C on AMG vehi-cles) and S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.

Gear Driving situations

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect

5 You can use the braking effect ofthe engine on downhill gradientsand for driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches

Switching on the manual drive programActivating permanentlyX Press the program selector button(Y page 150) repeatedly untilM appears inthe multifunction display.Manual drive program M remains activeuntil drive program E (drive program C onAMG vehicles) or S is selected.

Activating temporarilyX Pull the right or left steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 151).M is shown in the multifunction display.Manual drive program M is temporarilyactive. Depending on which paddle shifteris pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear downor up.

i When manual drive program M is activa-ted via the steering wheel paddle shifters,the temporarily active manual drive pro-gram M will be deactivated automaticallyafter a limited time, if the driving situationpermits. The automatic transmissionswitches to the previously activated driveprogram E (drive program C on AMG vehi-cles) or S. When driving on downhill gradi-ents, the temporarily active manual driveprogram M will only be deactivated if theaccelerator pedal is depressed while thevehicle is rolling downhill.

152 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

UpshiftingX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 151).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): inorder to prevent engine damage the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts up:Rif the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached andRyou continue to accelerate.

AMG vehicles:

! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

Shift recommendationThe gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.

X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

AMG vehicles

! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-tifunction display.X If the color in the speedometer multifunc-tion display changes to red and the UPUP dis-play message is shown, shift up a gear.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 151).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmission auto-matically shifts down.

i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until thetransmission selects the optimum gear forthe current speed.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speedwhen shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against enginedamage by not shifting down.

Automatic transmission 153

Drivingandparking

Z

KickdownAMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kick-down in temporary manual drive program M.You can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

i During kickdown, you cannot shift gearsusing the steering wheel paddle shifters.

i If you apply full throttle, the automatictransmission shifts up to the next gearwhen the maximum engine speed isreached. This prevents the engine fromoverrevving.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 150) repeatedly until E (drive pro-gramC in AMG vehicles) orS appears in themultifunction display.

Deactivating the temporary manual driveprogramX Pull and hold the right steering wheel pad-dle shifter until the automatic transmissionshifts into the last active automatic driveprogram E (drive program C on AMG vehi-cles) or S.

i When manual drive program M is deacti-vated, the automatic transmission in auto-matic drive program E (drive program C onAMG vehicles) or S may shift from the cur-rent gear into a higher or lower gear. This isdependent on the position of the accelera-tor pedal, speed and load.

154 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger shifts into all ofthe gears.Reverse gear can nolonger be engaged.

The transmission is in emergency mode.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

Refueling 155

Drivingandparking

Z

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 348).

Refueling

General informationThe fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you open or close the vehiclewith the SmartKey.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayedæ in the instrument cluster. The arrow onthe filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-cle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= To insert the fuel filler cap? Fuel type to be used

X Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into holder on theinside of fuel filler flap=.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. A message appears in the multi-function display (Y page 231).In addition, the;Check Enginewarninglamp may light up (Y page 251).For further information onwarning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 251).

156 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock immediatelyand remove it (Y page 141).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 77).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

Parking 157

Drivingandparking

Z

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe transmission position display mustshow P.Rthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the frontwheels must be turned towards the curb.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles)X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.

AMG vehicles:X Apply the electric parking brake.X Press button:.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.If you then open one of the front doors orremove the SmartKey from the ignition, theautomatic transmission shifts to P.If you shift the automatic transmission toNbefore switching off the engine, the auto-matic transmission remains in N even if adoor is opened.

i The automatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically if you:Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKeyand remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock orRswitch off the engine using the SmartKeyand open a front door.

If you attempt to turn off the engine when theselector lever is not in position P:Ramessage appears in themultifunction dis-playRa warning signal sounds

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

158 ParkingDrivingandparking

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunctionin the system, it may not be possible to applythe released parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it roll-ing away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake, if the on-board voltage is lowor there is a malfunction in the system. Con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

i The electric parking brake performs afunction test at regular intervals while theengine is switched off. The sounds that canbe heard while this is occurring are normal.

Applying/releasing manually

ApplyingX Push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.

i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

ReleasingX Pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

i You can only release the electric parkingbrake when the SmartKey is in position 1 or2 in the ignition lock.

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is applied auto-matically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationary orRif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehi-cle at a standstill

In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt isnot fastened.Rthere is a system malfunction.Rthe power supply is insufficient.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.

i The electric parking brake is not automat-ically engaged if the engine is switched offby the ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyYour vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-matically released if all of the following con-ditions are met:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.

Parking 159

Drivingandparking

Z

If the transmission is in position R, the trunklid must be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi-tion P or you have previously driven fasterthan 2 mph (3 km/h).

i Ensure that you do not depress the accel-erator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking brake will be released and the vehi-cle will start to move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake (Y page 158).

i The vehicle is braked for as long as han-dle: of the electric parking brake ispressed. The longer electric parking brakehandle: is depressed, the greater thebraking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

160 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:RThe tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.RRemove unnecessary loads.RRemove roof racks when they are not nee-ded.RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.RHave all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, only have work on the engine carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the selec-ted settings and prevailing conditions. Yourdriving style can significantly influence thevehicle's consumption.

Example: ECO display

The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationAccelerationRConstantConstantRCoastingCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percent-age indicates a more economical drivingstyle.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. A fixed percentage countin the ECO display does not indicate a fixedconsumption.

Driving tips 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RLoadRTire pressureRCold startRChoice of routeRElectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-tion processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstantConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccelerationAcceleration and ConstantConstant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for ConstantConstantwill change.

i The ECO display summarizes the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the bars

change dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. Formore dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 200).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting toa lower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's brakingeffect. For this, you need to have selectedmanual drive programM. This helps you toavoid overheating the brakes and wearingthem out excessively.When you take advantage of the engine'sbraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-face. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedalon downhill gradients while the manualdrive program M is temporarily activated:the automatic transmission may switch tothe last active automatic drive programE orS. The automatic transmission may shift toa higher gear. This can reduce the engine'sbraking effect.

162 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. Thismay also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. This will warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.

RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarn-ing tone while the engine is running, thebrake fluid level may be too low. Observeadditional warning messages in the multi-function display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. This work should be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom-eter. If you are planning to have the vehicletested on such a dynamometer, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center toobtain further information first. Otherwise,you could damage the drive train or thebrake system.

! As the ESP® system operates automati-cally, the engine and the ignition must beswitched off (the SmartKeymust be in posi-tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested on abrake dynamometer (for a maximum often seconds)Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axleraised.

Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop to arrange this.

Driving tips 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 64).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-cle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

Checking brake lining thicknessYou can measure the break pad/lining thick-ness using a test gauge. Color-coding (greenor red) on the test gauge allows you to deter-mine whether the brake pad/lining thicknessis still sufficient. The test gauge is in the vehi-cle document wallet in the glove box.

Front wheel

Rear wheelX Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitableposition so that you can attach test gaugeA.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 157).

X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Place test gaugeA between the wheel'sspokes on brake pad/lining=.

164 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

X Hold test gaugeA vertically on brakedisc: and slide measuring pin; ontobrake disc:.

X Check which color field? the arrow onmeasuring pin; is pointing to.Green: the brake pad/lining thickness issufficient.Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is notsufficient. Have the brake pads/liningchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

To avoid an inaccurate measurement:Rmake sure you position the wheels suitablyRdo not put the measuring pin on a recess inthe brake disc

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.X Try to bring the vehicle under control usingcorrective steering.

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

Driving tips 165

Drivingandparking

Z

You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 317).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 316).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 316).

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select a low gear ingood time. For this, you will need to haveselected manual drive program M(Y page 152). By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine. Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.

Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the selector lever must be in position D.

166 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumedwhen the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up thelast stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards= .

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Rthe vehicle is secured with the electricparking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐Cruise Con‐trol Offtrol Off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-cles are detected with the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically so that the set speed is notexceeded.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is espe-cially important if the vehicle is laden. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-vent a collision without your intervention. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

168 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS-TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. DIS-TRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are respon-sible for the distance to the vehicle in front,for vehicle speed, for braking in good time andfor staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rain

Rthere is interference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inparking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-edly accelerate the vehicle to the storedspeed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-handlane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the fol-lowing activation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-ted.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.

ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou? or press it up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down; until the desired speed isset.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS PassivePassivemes-sage appears in the multifunction display.The set distance to a slower-moving vehiclein front will then not bemaintained. Youwillbe driving at the speed you determine bythe position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is18 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou? or press it up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever(Y page 169) towards you?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and drivingi The vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is drivingon a different line from another vehicle. Thevehicle then brakes automatically. There isa risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at alltimes.

If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.X If you want to pull away with DIS-TRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever(Y page 169) towards you?.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehi-cle accelerates to the set speed.

170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.The vehicle is only accelerated up to thespeed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty drivingstyle when you have selected the S or M driv-ing program (Y page 150). Accelerationbehind the vehicle in front or to the set speedis then noticeably more dynamic. If you haveselected the E driving program, the vehicleaccelerates more gently. This setting is rec-ommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 43.5 mph(70 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-tance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivating DIS-TRONIC PLUS (Y page 173).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstillat a sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance isset using the control on the cruise controllever.

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver'sdoor is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If amalfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly

press the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 174).

i Make sure that you maintain the mini-mum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

172 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X To increase: turn control= in direc-tion;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control= in direc-tion:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivate DIS-TRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS OffOffmessage inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine. DISTRONICPLUSis not deactivated if you depress the accel-erator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or ifthe vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN position

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐DIS‐TRONICTRONIC PLUSPLUS OffOffmessage in the multifunc-tion display for approximately five seconds.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront= and stored speed: light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 204) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance display.X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 204).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only

appears when the cruise control lever isactuated)

X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 204).

You will initially see the stored speed forabout five seconds when you activate DIS-TRONIC PLUS.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles thatare crossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with cross-ing traffic, for example, could cause your vehi-cle to pull away unintentionally.

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

HOLD function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function(Y page 177).

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission position D, R or N isengaged while driving a vehicle with anautomatic transmissionRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

Example: vehicles with a color multifunction dis-playX Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatictransmission: only when the transmissionis in position D or R.Rthe transmission is in positionP on vehicleswith automatic transmission.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure until: disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If amalfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay be shifted into position P automatically.

RACE START

Important safety notesRACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start. The precondition forthis is a suitable high-grip road surface.RACE START is intended solely for activationon dedicated race circuits.

i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi-cles.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors, hood and the trunk lid areclosed.Rthe engine is running and the transmission,all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are atoperating temperature.RSPORT handling mode is activated.(Y page 69)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.Rdrive program M is selected (Y page 150).

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Pull and hold both steering wheel shift pad-dles.

X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPRACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWNCancel: Paddle DOWN message appearsin the multifunction display.

X Release both steering wheel shift paddles.i If the activation conditions are no longerfulfilled, RACE START is canceled. TheRACE START Not Possible See Opera‐RACE START Not Possible See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel pad-dle shifter (Y page 151).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 151).The RACE START Available DepressRACE START Available Depressgas pedalgas pedal message appears in the multi-function display.i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal within a few seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed is increased.The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake tostartstart message appears in the multifunc-tion display.i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin a short time, RACE START will becanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-eration.The RACERACE STARTSTART ActiveActivemessage appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S is acti-vated. SPORT handling mode remains activa-ted.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activation condi-tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACERACE STARTSTARTNot PossibleNot Possible or RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceledmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

4MATIC4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-manently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehicle when-ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficientgrip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle in

front, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheelsmust remain either on the ground orbe fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-TRONIC does not detect such objects whenthey are in the immediate vicinity of thevehicle. You could damage the vehicle orthe objects.

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the electric parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Side view

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 291).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is loca-ted on the headliner in the rear compartment.

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness=light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-minewhichwarning display is activewhen theengine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and theindicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 291).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention can assist you duringmaneuvering and parking. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 178).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Make sure thatno persons, animals or objects are in themaneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at asharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-ing space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or over-grown might be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 180) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of the vehi-cle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range,Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 179).Active Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces at right-angles to thedirection of travel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directlynext to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces that are parallel or atright-angles to the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe parking space is apparently blocked,for example by foliage or grass pavingblocksRthe range of movement is too smallRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-cle which is not clearly defined such as atree or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is automatically activa-ted when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

system independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travelRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 39.5 in (1.0m) longer than yourvehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) widerthan your vehicle

i In the case of parking spaces that are atright angles to the direction of travel,please ensure that the parking space islong enough to accommodate your vehicle.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears. By default, Active Parking Assistonly displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-er's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. Whenparking on the driver's side, this must remainswitched on until you acknowledge the use ofActive Parking Assist by pressing theabutton on the multifunction steering wheel.The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or atright-angles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGActive Parking Assist merely aids you by inter-vening actively in the steering. If you do notbrake there is a risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself whenmaneuvering and parking.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake atall times. Do not exceed a maximum speedof approximately 5 mph (10 km/h) whenbacking up. Otherwise Active ParkingAssist will be canceled.i In tight parking spaces, you will achievethe best parking results by backing up asfar as possible. When doing so, alsoobserve the PARKTRONIC messages.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Maneuvering may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DPark Assist Active Select DObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

The Park Assist Active Select RPark Assist Active Select RObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.Further transmission shifts may be neces-sary.As soon as the parking procedure is com-plete, the Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finished messageappears and a warning tone sounds.Active Parking Assist is then deactivated.PARKTRONIC is still available.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions. When ActiveParking Assist is finished, you must steeragain yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages dis-played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 180).

Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you should can-cel the parking procedure with Active Park-ing Assist.RYou can also engage forward gear prema-turely. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should agear be changed too early, the parking pro-

cedure will be canceled. A sensible parkingposition can no longer be achieved fromthis position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can sup-port you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough. A curb is too small, for exam-ple.Rthe border of the parking spacemust not betoowide, as the position of the vehiclemustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the park-ing space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, beingready to brake at all times. Do not exceed amaximum speed of approximately 6 mph(10 km/h) when exiting a parking space.

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-celed.

X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the con-tinuous warning tone, if not before.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired while the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistPark AssistActive Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and BrakeObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone andthe Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering, before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognizethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen-ter console (Y page 180).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-cally if:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than6mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage.If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you muststeer again yourself.

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is in the trunk lid handle.The rear view camera is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to showthe area behind your vehicle in the Audio/COMAND display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.The rear view camera is protected from rain-drops and dust by means of a flap. When therear view camera is activated, this flap opens.Only once themaneuvering process has beencompleted and the rear view camera hasswitched off does the flap close again. Fortechnical reasons, the flap may remain openbriefly after the rear view camera has beendeactivated. If you switch off the engine, theflap will also close.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rearview camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 291).

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that there

are no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"function is selected in the Audio system/COMAND Online; see the separate operat-ing instructions.

X Engage reverse gear.Guide lines are used to show the areabehind the vehicle in the Audio/COMANDdisplay.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to P onvehicles with automatic transmission or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Displays in the Audio/COMAND displayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin close range above the handle on thetrunk lid

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

Lanes: White guide line without turning the steer-

ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle, vehicle width to the outerside of the wheels (dynamic)

= Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

? Bumper

Guide lines? BumperA Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 10 in (0.25m) from the rear of thevehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)D Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

The lanes and guide lines are only displayed ifyou have engaged reverse gear.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONICand COMAND: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicleswith PARKTRONIC andCOMAND:if PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 178),

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

an additional operational readiness indicatorwill appear in COMAND display;.If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in theCOMAND display.

"Reverse parking" functionX Make sure that the rear view camera isactivated and the "Reverse parking" func-tion is selected; see the separate operatinginstructions for the audio system/COMAND.The lane and the guide lines are shown.

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White lane with steering wheel straight; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

= Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 10 in (0.25m) from the rear of thevehicle

X With the help of white lane:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using the white lane as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line= is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost paral-lel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angleX Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

Turning the steering wheel: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle

will take with the steering wheel in its cur-rent position

; Parking space markingX While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the park-ing space until the red lane reaches parkingspace marking;.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

Backing up with the steering wheel turned: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle

will take with the steering wheel in its cur-rent position

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possi-ble.

Driving to the final position: White lane at current steering wheel angle; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-tion while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White lane with steering wheel straight= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica-tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con-centration on the part of the driver, it sug-gests you take a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steeringcharacteristicsRjourney details, e.g. time of day and lengthof journey

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak-ing a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Warning and display messages in themultifunction displayX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 206).If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes afteryour journey has begun. You then hear anintermittent warning tone twice and theAttention Assist: Take a Break!Attention Assist: Take a Break!message appears in the multifunction dis-play.

X If necessary, take a break.X Press thea or% button to confirmthe message.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned againafter 15 minutes at the earliest. The precon-dition for this is that ATTENTION ASSIST stilldetects typical indicators of fatigue orincreasing lapses in concentration.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-tinue your journey and starts assessing yourtiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphic display.

Speed Limit Assist

General notesSpeed Limit Assist shows you detected speedlimits in the multifunction display. Data fromthe navigation system is also used for thispurpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speedlimit or the end of a speed limit is detected, itis shown in themultifunction display. If SpeedLimit Assist does not detect any traffic signs,the speed limit from the digital road map isused and shown in the display.

Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signswith a camera attached behind the top of thewindshield.

: Speed Limit Assist camera

Important safety notesSpeed Limit Assist is only an aid and does notalways detect traffic signs with informationabout the maximum permissible speed. Traf-fic signs always have priority over the SpeedLimit Assist display.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or fromoncoming trafficRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov-ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinityof the cameraRthe traffic signs are covered, for instance bydirt, snow or treesRthe traffic signs are poorly illuminatedRthere are ambiguous traffic signs, forinstance near roadworks or on multi-laneroads

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Information in themultifunction displayBriefly showing detected traffic signs inthe multifunction displayX Activate the Speed Limit Assist warningfunction using the on-board computer(Y page 205).A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or theend of a speed limit appears in the multi-function display for around five seconds assoon as it is detected. Any other informa-tion in the multifunction display is hiddenfor this period.

: Maximum permissible speed (example); Maximum permissible speed for vehicles

subject to the restriction in the additionalsign (example)

= Additional character in fog? Speed Limit Assist is available and

switched onPermanently showing detected trafficsigns in the multifunction displayX Display the assistance graphic using theon-board computer (Y page 204).A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or theend of a speed limit appears in the multi-function display as soon as it is detected.

Traffic sign: indicating a speed limit is gen-erally displayed until:Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speedlimit is detected.Ryou make a turn.Ryou leave or enter a city.

Rthe road type changes (e.g. highway, coun-try road).Ryou have traveled a certain minimum dis-tance without the traffic sign being repea-ted or detected again.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 191) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 193).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive a visual and audible collisionwarning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assistuses sensors in the rear bumper.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.

i USA only:

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain or snowRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbike or bicycleRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assistmonitors the area up to 10 ft(3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly nextto your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For

this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radarsensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if the vehicles are driving on the innerside of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, iceor slush in the vicinity of the sensors. Forexample, the radar sensors must not be cov-ered by bicycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may oth-erwise not work properly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h), then warning lamp: onthe corresponding side lights up red. Thiswarning is always emitted when a vehicleenters the blind spot monitoring range frombehind or from the side. When you overtake avehicle, the warning only occurs if the differ-ence in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa-ted in the on-board computer(Y page 206).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle with camera:, which ismounted at the top of the windshield. ActiveLaneKeepingAssist detects lanemarkings onthe road and can warn you before you leaveyour lane unintentionally.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 206).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,

the lane markings in the assistance graph-ics display (Y page 204) are shown ingreen.

WhenStandard is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

WhenAdaptive is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a free-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Useful information ............................ 196Important safety notes .................... 196Displays and operation .................... 196Menus and submenus ...................... 199Display messages ............................. 213Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 243

195

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore makesure your vehicle is operating safely at all

times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-ating safely may cause an accident.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 31).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-trol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 31).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwiseor counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

196 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side.Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe speedometer is divided into segments onvehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.The segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 166):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 168):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Displays and operation 197

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling through thephone book

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial mem-ory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separate oper-ating instructionsRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction display

: Permanent display: outside temperatureor speed (Y page 208)

; Time= Text field? Menu barA Drive program (Y page 147)B Transmission position (Y page 147)

198 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

X To show menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar? disappears after a few seconds.Text field= shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the audio sys-tem or COMAND, see the separate operat-ing instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Shift recommendation

(Y page 152)XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 181)CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 166)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 112)¤ ECO start/stop function

(Y page 143)ë HOLD function (Y page 176)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewOperating the on-board computer(Y page 197).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 199)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 201)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 202)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 203)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 204)RServ.Serv. menu (Y page 207)RSettSett menu (Y page 207)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 210)The AudioAudio, NaviNavi and TelTelmenus differ slightlyin vehicles with an audio system and in vehi-cles with COMAND. The examples given inthis Operator's Manual apply to vehiclesequipped with COMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 200).The From StartFrom Start trip computer is automati-cally reset when:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

Menus and submenus 199

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

ECO display

Example: ECO display

The ECO display is not available for AMG vehi-cles.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.Further information on the ECO display(Y page 161).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theapproximate range and the current fuelconsumption (not for AMG vehicles).

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows avehicle being refueledC instead of therange.

Digital speedometer

: Shift recommendation (Y page 152); Digital speedometerGearshift recommendation: is not given onAMG vehicles.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

i If you reset the values in the ECO display,the values in the "From start" trip computerare also reset. If you reset the values in the

200 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

"From start" trip computer, the values inthe ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsX Switch on the audio system or COMAND;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

In the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Symbol for change of directionWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction (white)

? Lane not recommended (dark gray)A Possible laneB Symbol for change of directionOn multilane roads, new lane recommenda-tions can be displayed for the next change ofdirection if the digital map supports this data.During the change of direction, new lanesmay be added.

Menus and submenus 201

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Recommended lane=: in this lane you willbe able to complete the next change of direc-tion and the one after that.Lane not recommended?: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.Possible laneA: you will be able to completethe next change of direction in this lane only.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new routeROff mapOff map or Off roadOff road: the vehicle positionis outside the area of the digital map (off-map position).RNo routeNo route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory positionThe memory position is only displayed alongwith station; if this has been stored.X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio; see the separate operat-ing instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the station list:press and briefly hold the9 or:button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

i For information on changing wavebandand storing stations, see the separate oper-ating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

CD changer display (example): Current titleAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3mode; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired track: hasbeen reached.If you press and hold9 or:, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all

202 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

audio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

DVD changer display (example)X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select video DVD; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene: hasbeen reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on your mobile phone and audiosystem or COMAND, see the separateoperating instructions.

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to theaudio system or COMAND; see the sepa-rate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RTelephone No ServiceTelephone No Service: there is no net-work available or the mobile phone issearching for a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming callX Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in the TelTelmenu, a display message appears in the mul-tifunction display.You can accept a call even if you are not in theTelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.

Menus and submenus 203

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Dialing an entry from the phone bookX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the9 or: button for longer than onesecond.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ or% button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have the fol-lowing options:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 204)RActivating/deactivating the Speed LimitAssist message function (Y page 205)RActivating/deactivating ESP®(Y page 205)RActivating/deactivating the distance warn-ing function (Y page 205)RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 206)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSIST (Y page 206)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist(Y page 206)RActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 206)

Assistance graphic

204 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select AssistanceAssistanceGraphicGraphic.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the DIS-TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assis-tance graphic.

The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 174)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 189)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 193)RSpeed Limit Assist (Y page 190)RDistance warning function of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST (Y page 64)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 67)

Speed Limit Assist

Activating/deactivating the Speed LimitAssist message functionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectSpeed Limit AssistSpeed Limit Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate or deactivate: pressa.When the Speed Limit Assist messagefunction is activated, the assistancegraphic shows theÄ symbol.If the Speed Limit Assist message functionis activated, a detected speed limit is auto-matically displayed for five seconds. Otheritems in the multifunction display are sup-pressed during this time.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Observe the "Important safety notes" sectionin the description of ESP (Y page 68).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelActivating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehi-cles (Y page 69).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 67).X Start the engine.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectESPESP.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.ESP® is deactivated if the å warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.

If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 247).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 214).

Activating/deactivating the distancewarning functionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select DistanceDistanceWarningWarning.

Menus and submenus 205

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When the distance warning function is acti-vated, theÄ symbol appears in the mul-tifunction display in the assistance graphicdisplay.

Further information on the distance warningfunction (Y page 64).

Activating/deactivating COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectCollision Prevent. AssistCollision Prevent. Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS is activated, theÄ symbolappears in the multifunction display in theassistance graphic display.

For further information about COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, theÀ symbol appears in the assistancegraphic in the multifunction display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 189).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 191).When the Blind Spot Assist SensorsBlind Spot Assist SensorsDeactivatedDeactivated message is shown, the radarsensors are deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system(Y page 209).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, themultifunction display shows the lane mark-ings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.

For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 193).

206 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Maintenance menu

In the ServServ menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 213)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 321)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 286)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettSett menu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging the instrument cluster settingsRChanging the light settingsRChanging the vehicle settingsRChanging the convenience settingsRRestoring the factory settings

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the TripTrip menuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRnavigation instructions in the NaviNavi menuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometeron/offThe Speedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h] or SpeedometerSpeedometer[mph][mph] function allows you to choose whetherthe multifunction display in the status areaalways shows the speed in km/hkm/h or in mphmphinstead of the outside temperature.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 207

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select theSpeedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h] or SpeedometerSpeedometer[mph][mph] function.You will see the selected setting: onon or offoff.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent DisplayPermanent Display function.You will see the selected setting OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or Speedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offCanada only: daytime running lamps arerequired by law. You cannot set the DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightsRunning Lights function via the on-boardcomputer.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights functionhas been switched on, the cone of light andtheW symbol in the multifunction dis-play are shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 109).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light +/-Amb. Light +/- function.You will see the selected setting.

X Change the setting witha.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to a level from OffOff to Level 5Level 5(bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Activating/deactivating surround light-ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-offIf you have activated the Surround Light‐Surround Light‐inging function and the light switch is set toÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the key. If you start the engine, thesurround lighting is switched off and auto-matic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 109).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you closeall the doors and the trunk lid, the exteriorlighting goes off after 15 seconds.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theSurround LightingSurround Lighting function.When the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the area

208 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

around the vehicle are displayed in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-rior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart-Key to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-lowing light up:RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior LightingInterior LightingDelayDelay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay function.If the InteriorInterior LightingLighting DelayDelay functionhas been switched on, the vehicle interior isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function.When the AutomaticAutomatic DoorDoor LockLock functionis activated, the vehicle doors are displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.If you activate the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automatic lock-ing feature, see (Y page 83).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction dis-play lights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 209

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the9 or: button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.If the radar sensor system is switched off,Blind Spot Assist is deactivated (Y page 191).

Convenience

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 105).When you activate the Auto.Auto. MirrorMirror Fold‐Fold‐inging function, the exterior mirrors are foldedin when the vehicle is locked.If you unlock the vehicle and then open adoor, the exterior mirrors fold out again.If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors using the button on the door(Y page 103), they will not fold out automat-ically. The exterior mirrors can then only befolded out using the button on the door.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select NoNoor YesYes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLampsLamps function in the LightLight submenu is onlyreset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperatureX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

Upshift indicator UPUP= indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UPUP= fades out other mes-sages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †), oil temperature? is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.If the transmission fluid temperature is below122‡ (50†), oil temperatureB is shown inblue. Avoid driving at full engine output duringthis time.

210 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

SETUP

: Drive program (CC/SS/MM); ESP® mode (ONON/OFFOFF) or SPORT handling

mode (SPORTSPORT)SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Lap; RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of six-teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-pleted with Finish LapFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Confirm YesYes witha.The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the

Menus and submenus 211

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

key to position 2 or 3 and then pressa toconfirm StartStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race Timer?Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapThis function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

212 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function(Y page 176) and parking (Y page 157).

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can callup the display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 213

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill start assistare temporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, theJ,÷,å and!warning lamps light upin the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING

214 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 215

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailabledue to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, theHOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a mal-function.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

216 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 158).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 158).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeParking Brake SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow!warning lamp and the redF (USA only)/!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 158).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 217

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 337).X Shift the transmission to P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 158).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

218 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only)/!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)ParkingParking BrakeBrake Inop‐Inop‐erativeerative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐Turn On the Igni‐tion to Releasetion to Releasethe Parking Brakethe Parking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

Display messages 219

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperativeInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-tioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

220 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist PlusCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-tional. Possible causes are:Rthe front bumper is dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the front bumper (Y page 291).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 69).

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist PlusInoperativeInoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is malfunctioning. The dis-tance warning signal may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 221

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions Cur‐Functions Cur‐rentlyrently LimitedLimited SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causesare:Rthe front bumper is dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the front bumper (Y page 291).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 69).

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedFunctions LimitedSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

Adaptive Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning signal mayalso have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on occupant safety (Y page 40).

222 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6FrontFront LeftLeft Malfunc‐Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or FrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or RearRearRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Right Side Cur‐Right Side Cur‐tain Airbag Mal‐tain Airbag Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-tain air bag. The6warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-gered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check the fol-lowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 47).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

224 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsFor further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 47).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbagAirbag EnabledEnabled SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check the fol-lowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classifi-cation System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag(Y page 47).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display.

Display messages 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 47).

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left Corner‐Check Left Corner‐ing Lighting Light or CheckCheckRight CorneringRight CorneringLightLight

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

226 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Brake LampRight Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps orCheck Right TailCheck Right Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight High BeamRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left FogCheck Left FogLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Fog LampRight Fog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bRear Fog LampRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup LightBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left TailLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Tail LampRight Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 114).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning Light orCheck Right Day‐Check Right Day‐time Running Lighttime Running Light

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

228 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bActive HeadlampsActive HeadlampsInoperativeInoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-ative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is dis-played.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Display messages 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel See Opera‐Level See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 285).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

230 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 283).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 284).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

æFuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

Display messages 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

æGas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Speed Limit AssistSpeed Limit AssistCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-play message disappears.Speed Limit Assist is operational again.

SpeedSpeed LimitLimit AssistAssistInoperativeInoperative

Speed Limit Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

232 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 176).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 176).

RadarRadar SensorsSensors Deac‐Deac‐tivated See Opera‐tivated See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 209).

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the sensors (Y page 291).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Can‐Park Assist Can‐celedceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 181).

234 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ParkPark AssistAssist inoper‐inoper‐ativeative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-imately ten minutes (Y page 181).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 168). If it wasdeactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 168).

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Cur‐Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator trim are dirtyRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.RThe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 291).X Restart the engine.

Display messages 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may alsohave failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInactiveInactive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 170).

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 166).

236 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Please CorrectPlease CorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 321).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 323).

Check TiresCheck Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 296).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 321).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Display messages 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐functionfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 296).

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Currentlytor CurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

TirePress. Sen‐TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itor Inoperativeitor InoperativeNo Wheel SensorsNo Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Inoperativetor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

238 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary BatteryMalfunctionMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P beforeyou switch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Depress Brake toDepress Brake toStart EngineStart Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

ToTo DeselectDeselect PP oror N,N,Depress Brake andDepress Brake andStart EngineStart Engine

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or Dwithout starting the engine.X Start the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.

i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P tothe desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only thencan the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress thebrake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but theparking lock remains engaged.

i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4‡ (Ò20†) you canonly shift out of position P into another transmission positionwhen the engine is running.

Apply Brake toApply Brake toShift from 'P'Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission NotTransmission Notin Pin PRisk of VehicleRisk of VehicleRolling AwayRolling Away

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in positionR,N orD.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).

Display messages 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only ShiftOnly Shiftto 'P' when Vehi‐to 'P' when Vehi‐cle is Stationarycle is Stationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Reversing Not Pos‐Reversing Not Pos‐sible Servicesible ServiceRequiredRequired

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot backup.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐functionfunction

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐function Stopfunction Stop

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

StopStop VehicleVehicle ShiftShiftto P Leave Engineto P Leave EngineRunningRunning

The automatic transmission has overheated.X Drive on carefully.The automatic transmission is available again when the displaymessage goes out.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and thedisplay message has disappeared.

240 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Trans.Trans. OilOil Overhea‐Overhea‐ted Drive on withted Drive on withCareCare

AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.Manual drive programM and the temporarily active manual driveprogram are no longer available. The engine power output isreduced.X Allow the vehicle to cool down.

4matic Currently4matic CurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) has overheated. The vehicle isonly driven by the front wheels.X Drive on.The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available againand the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.

4matic Inoperative4matic Inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the frontwheels.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

Display messages 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÐPowerPower SteeringSteering Mal‐Mal‐function See Oper‐function See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.

i If you do not mix antifreeze with the washer fluid in the wintermonths, then the washer fluid could freeze in the washer fluidreservoir. In this case, the Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid display mes-sage may appear in the multifunction display.

X Add washer fluid (Y page 286).

Wiper Malfunction‐Wiper Malfunction‐inging

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard WarningHazard WarningFlashers Malfunc‐Flashers Malfunc‐tioningtioning

The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

242 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Key Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

+TakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

+Obtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, a warn-ing tone sounds for upto six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up afterthe engine starts, assoon as the driver's orthe front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

244 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-function.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (ElectronicStability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist, forexample, are also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-mission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, EBD (elec-tronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hill startassist, for example, are therefore also deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

246 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, theHOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not availableeither.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷ å !

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS,EBD, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are notavailable either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP® warn-ing lamp flashes whilethe vehicle is in motion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated. ESP®will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts toskid or if a wheel starts to spin.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORT han-dling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations(Y page 69).

248 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, the HOLD function and hill start assist arenot available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST/COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F (USA only)! (Canada only)The red indicator lampfor the electric parkingbrake flashes or lightsup and/or the yellowwarning lamp for theelectric parking brakelights up.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

For further information about SRS, see (Y page 40).

250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may bein emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamplights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal require-ments. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply inthe state in which you are currently driving.

æ

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

æ

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the engine is run-ning.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-shop.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe engine is runningand the coolant tem-perature gauge is at thestart of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormaybe blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-tioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 285). Observethe warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isbelow248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-flow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the coolant levelmaybe too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).

252 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 285). Observethe warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

·

The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.

The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speedselected.X Increase the distance.

·

The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.A warning tone alsosounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

For further information about the distance warning function ofCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (Y page 64).For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS (Y page 67).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 157).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 296).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 321).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

254 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Useful information ............................ 256Loading guidelines ............................ 256Stowage areas .................................. 256Features ............................................. 262

255

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the gross axleweight rating of the vehicle (including occu-pants). The values are specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as pos-sible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear orfront seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteningmaterials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.

256 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 256).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

i There is a pen holder at the top of theglove box flap.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the center con-sole

Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT leverX To open: press the marking on cover:.i Depending on the vehicle equipment,there may be an ashtray in the center con-sole instead of a storage compartment.

Stowage areas 257

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment in front of the arm-rest (vehicles with automatic transmis-sion)

Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT leverX To open: press the marking on cover:.

i You can remove the non-slip mat and theinsert for cleaning. When removing theinsert you will have to overcome someslight resistance.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: on vehicles with moveable armr-ests, make sure that the armrest is in therearmost position.

X Press button: and fold the armrest up.

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, thearmrest can be moved backwards or for-wards in a longitudinal direction.

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, aUSB connection or a Media Interface isinstalled in the stowage compartment. AMedia Interface is a universal interface forportable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod®

or MP3 player (see the separate Audio orCOMAND Operating Instructions).

Stowage compartment under the driver'sseat and front-passenger seatG WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for the stow-age compartment, the cover may not be ableto restrain the items. Itemsmay be thrown outof the stowage compartment and hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the trunk.

The maximum permissible load of the stow-age compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To open: pull handle: up and foldcover; forwards.

258 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear centerconsole

X To open: pull down the top of stowagecompartment: by the edge of the handle.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,theremay be an open stowage space abovethe stowage compartment.

Parcel netsParcel nets are located:Rin the front-passenger footwellRon the back of the driver's and the front-passenger seatRon the left and right-hand side in the trunkObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 256)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 256).

Through-loading facility in the rearObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 256).

X To open: fold down seat armrest:.X Pull the center head restraint on the rearbench seat into the uppermost position(Y page 99).

X Slide locking mechanism= in the direc-tion of the arrow.

X Swing flap; fully to the side.Flap; is held open by a magnet.

X To close: swing flap; in the trunk backuntil it engages.

X Fold armrest: up fully if necessary.

Rear bench seat through-loading fea-ture

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.

Stowage areas 259

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot berestrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

! Before folding the backrest in the rearcompartment forwards, make sure that therear compartment armrest and thecupholder are folded in. They may other-wise be damaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 256).

Folding the rear seat backrest forwardsand back

Folding the rear seat backrest forwardThe left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-ests can be folded forwards separately toincrease the trunk capacity.

X Fully insert the backrest head restraints(Y page 100).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-dle; of the seat backrest forwards.Corresponding seat backrest: isreleased.

X Fold backrest: forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

X Insert the seat belt into seat-beltextender:.

Folding the rear seat backrest back

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.Red lock status indicator; is no longervisible.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 100).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

260 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down ringsObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines(Y page 256).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

: Cargo tie-down rings

Stowage well under the trunk floorUnder the trunk floor you can find a bracketfor TIREFIT and the vehicle tool kit, etc.

X To open: pull handle: up.

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

To enlarge the trunk you can remove the trunkfloor.X To remove: lift the trunk floor almost torain trough; and pull it out.

X To insert: place the trunk floor at the bot-tom in the center.

X Hold sides of trunk floor= and press in thedirection of the arrow until it engages inhooks?.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

Stowage areas 261

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-cle.Position the load on the roof rack in such away that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier is instal-led you can:Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fullyRopen the trunk lid fully

The maximum roof load is 165 lbs (75 kg).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers: upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-age points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot hold a container securewhilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilsttraveling, the container may be flung aroundand liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-pants may come into contact with the liquidand if it is hot, they may be scalded. You maybe distracted from the traffic conditions andyou could lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only use the cup holder for con-tainers of the right size. Always close the con-tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 256).

262 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The stowage compartments in the doors pro-vide space for bottles:Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l)Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter consoleThe cup holder and the rubber mat under-neath can be removed for cleaning. Cleanthem with clean, lukewarm water only.

X To remove: carefully pull in upper sectionsof cup holder: on the driver's and front-passenger sides until they release.

X Lift the cup holder upwards; until it canbe removed.

X To install: insert cup holder into lateralcurved sections; in the stowage com-partment. Insert the cup holder so that thewedge of the upper section of cupholder: faces forwards.

X Press the cup holder downwards until itengages on the right and left-hand sides.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; backuntil it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

Features 263

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that theashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise, thestowage space could be damaged.

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartmentX To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X To remove the insert: lift insert= up;and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert=into the holder until it engages.

i If you remove the ashtray insert, you canuse the resulting compartment for stow-age.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover= out by its top edge.X To remove: pull insert; by recess: inthe direction of arrow? until it audiblyreleases.

X Lift insert; up and out.X To install the insert: install insert; fromabove into the holder and press down untilit engages.

264 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartmentX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

Points to observe before useX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as lamps or chargersfor mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

Vehicles with a cover over the stowage compart-mentX To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Features 265

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicles without a cover over the stowage com-partmentX Lift up the cover of socket:.

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover: out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Socket in the trunk

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To log in,press the ï MB Info call button. If any ofthe steps mentioned are not carried out, thesystem may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and passwordwill be sent toyou by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

266 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of the audio sys-tem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐Inop‐erativeerative or Service Not ActivatedService Not Activatedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the systemmay not operate as expec-ted. In the event of an emergency, help willhave to be summoned by other means.

Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To reg-ister, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Features 267

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

General notesAnemergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Customer Assis-tance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter attempts to getmore information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-tinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.

In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-ble, mbrace will not be able to make theemergency call. If you leave the vehicleimmediately after pressing the SOS button,you will not know whether mbrace placedthe emergency call. In this case, alwayssummon assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

268 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows the Con‐Con‐necting Callnecting Callmessage. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter can ascertain the nature of the prob-lem (Y page 273).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiate aroadside assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-tance call button: is flashing continu-ously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp inMB Info call button:flasheswhile the connection is beingmade.The multifunction display shows the Con‐Con‐nectingnecting CallCallmessage. The audio systemis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

Features 269

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-ton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer-ing wheelRthe corresponding button on the audio sys-tem or on COMAND for ending a telephonecall

i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a database with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-tant destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

270 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phone net-work is available and data transfer is pos-sible.

i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through the cur-rent route section.

Search & Send

General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehiclemust be equipped with mbrace and a navi-gation system. Additionally, anmbrace ser-vice subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. A destination address which is found onGoogle Maps® can be transferred via mbracedirectly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://www.maps.google.com and enter a desti-nation address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on thewebsite.

i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Send" can be foundon the website.

Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select YesYes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe COMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

i If you have sent more than one destina-tion address, each individual destinationmust be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they weresent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles with mbrace and activated mbraceaccounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.

Features 271

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlock-ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe correspondingmobile phone network isaccessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote closing

may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be closedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter contacts you and the local law enforce-ment agency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

272 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto-matically notified.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-sis (Vehicle Health Check), the CustomerAssistance center can provide improved sup-port for problemswith your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance center. The customerservice representative can use the receiveddata to decide what kind of assistance isrequired. You are then, for example, guided tothe nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the Roadside Assis‐Roadside Assis‐tance Connectedtance Connected message in the COMANDdisplay. If the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis can be started, the Request forRequest forvehicle diagnosis received. Startvehicle diagnosis received. Startvehicle diagnosis?vehicle diagnosis? message appears inthe display.X Confirm the message with YesYes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis PleaseVehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignitionstart ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 141).

X When the PleasePlease followfollow thethe instruc‐instruc‐tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position.your vehicle to a safe position.message appears, follow the customer ser-vice representative's instructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select CancelCancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceled com-pletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosisactivated.activated. message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the SendSendvehicle diagnostics data//(Voicevehicle diagnostics data//(Voiceconnection may be//interrupted dur‐connection may be//interrupted dur‐inging datadata transfer)transfer)message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent to the CustomerAssistance center.X Press OKOK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:Transferring data...Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contactedat a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.Further functions of the vehicle remote mal-function diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a messageabout various special offers at your work-shop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oillevel, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receive informa-tion on special offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 23).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.

Features 273

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by the navi-gation system, you will see the <route<routename>name> hashas beenbeen savedsaved toto memorymemory card.card.DoDo youyou wantwant toto startstart routeroute guidance?guidance?message in the COMANDdisplay. The route issaved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select NoNo, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in the sep-arate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-cle, a message will be sent to the CustomerAssistance Center. The Customer AssistanceCenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-ded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can selectthe way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper-ate up to three different door and gate sys-tems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remote

274 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

control. Please also read the operatinginstructions for the garage door system.When programing a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programing.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (freeof charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also available onlineat http://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 25).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programing

Programing buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 275).

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmir-ror

Garage door remote controlA is not inclu-ded with the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use tocontrol the garage door drive.

X To start programing mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? of the inte-grated garage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ing mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programed for thefirst time. If the selected button has alreadybeen programed, indicator lamp: willonly light up yellow after ten seconds haveelapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towardsbuttons; to? on the rear-view mirror ata distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

Features 275

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programing is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-graming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 275).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror. To do this youwill need to use the programing button on thedoor drive control panel. The programing but-ton may be placed at different locationsdepending on the manufacturer. It is usuallylocated on the door drive unit on the garageceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage doordrive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-graming of additional remote controls",before carrying out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programing button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programed button;,=or? of the integrated garage door openeruntil the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programing the remote controlCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprograming. Comparable with Canadian law,someU.S. garage door openers also feature a"break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programing thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programing steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programing is finished.

276 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-graming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA ofthe garage door drive.If indicator lamp: blinks red: repeat theprograming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-viewmirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote con-trolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Problems when programingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on therear-view mirror, take note of the followinginstructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitterfrequency can usually be found on the backof the garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote controlAwill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programing, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programing. Try variousangles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat the

same programing steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remote con-trolA.RNote that some remote controls only trans-mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press buttonB on remote controlA againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogramed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.

The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow. Press but-ton;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before sellingthe vehicle.

Features 277

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Compass

Calling up the compassThe compass displays in which compassdirection the vehicle is currently traveling: NN,NENE, EE, SESE, SS, SWSW, WW or NWNW.

To receive a correct display in rear-view mir-ror:, the compass must be calibrated andthe magnetic field zone set.

Setting the compassX Determine your position using the followingzone maps.

North America zone map

South America zone mapX Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 278) for approximately three sec-onds.The zone currently selected appears incompass display; (Y page 278).

X To select the zone: push a round pen intoopening= (Y page 278) until the desiredzone is selected.If, after a few seconds, the display in com-pass display; (Y page 278) changesdirection, the zone has been selected.

278 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Calibrating the compassX Make sure that there is sufficient space foryou to drive in a circle without impedingtraffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly,do the following:Rcalibrate the compass in the open and notin the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines.Rswitch off electrical consumers such as theclimate control, windshield wipers or rearwindow defroster.Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.X Switch on the ignition.X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 278) for approximately six sec-onds, until symbol CC is shown in compassdisplay; (Y page 278).

X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph(10 km/h).When the calibration has successfully beencompleted, the current direction is shownin compass display; (Y page 278).

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the foot-well.

X Press safety catch knobs: onto retain-ers;.

X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Features 279

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

280

Useful information ............................ 282Engine compartment ........................ 282Maintenance ...................................... 286Care .................................................... 287

281

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

282 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap between the hood andthe radiator trim and press hood catchlever; to the left.

X Raise the hood.

X Pull support strut? out of bracketA.X Lift up support strut? and insert it intoyellow retaining clip=.

Closing the hoodX Raise the hood slightly and, at the sametime, remove support strut? from yellowretaining clip=.

X Swing support strut? down and press itinto bracketA until it engages.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Do not press the hoodclosed. Open the hood again and close itwith a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Engine compartment 283

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engineoil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

284 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 284).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 349).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

! The coolantmay only be checked and cor-rected when the engine is cool (coolanttemperature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Check-ing the coolant when the coolant tempera-

ture is above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result indamage to the engine or to the engine cool-ing system.

ExampleX Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehi-cle is on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below104 ‡ (40 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 351).

Engine compartment 285

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Windshield washer system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highly flam-mable. If it comes into contact with hot enginecomponents or the exhaust system it couldignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

ExampleX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to refill the washer fluid (Y page 242).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 352).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 283).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysService A in .. DaysRService A DueService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, shows the type ofservice. AA stands for a minor service and BB fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

286 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

Hiding a service messageX Press theaor%button on the steer-ing wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button to select theServ.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-val display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Care 287

Maintenance

andcare

Z

should drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-cle could be damaged if the transmission isin another position.

! Make sure that:

Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed/theairflow control is set to position 0).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at wash bays that are speciallydesigned for this purpose. Observe the legalrequirements in all countries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

288 CareMaintenance

andcare

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-

ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

The following cannot always be completelyrepaired:RscratchesRcorrosive depositsRareas affected by corrosionRdamage caused by inadequate careIn such cases, visit a qualified specialist work-shop.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface orif the paintwork has become dull, then thepaintwork should be cleaned. For cleaning,

Care 289

Maintenance

andcare

Z

please use the paint cleaner recommend andapproved by Mercedes Benz.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of approvedMercedes-Benzcare products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows.Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

290 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or clean-ing cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

Care 291

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To open the cover of the rear view cam-era: with the audio system/COMAND acti-vated, press the W button.

X Select SystemSystem by turning cVd the audiosystem/COMAND controller and pressWto confirm.

X Select RearRear viewview cameracamera and pressW toconfirm.

X Select Open camera coverOpen camera cover and pressWto confirm.The rear view camera cover opens.

X To clean the rear view camera: use clearwater and a soft cloth to clean cameralens:.

i The cover of the camera closes automat-ically when the SmartKey is at position 0 inthe ignition lock.

Cleaning the exhaust pipeImpurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

! AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes:do not use chrome polish to polish blackchromed screens. They will otherwise losetheir silky black shine. Rub the screen usinga lightly oiled cloth after every car wash.Commercially available engine oils, WD 40or Ballistol are suitable oils.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

292 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA

covers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaningresults depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entire

Care 293

Maintenance

andcare

Z

seat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor a cleaning agent recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

294 CareMaintenance

andcare

Useful information ............................ 296Where will I find...? ........................... 296Flat tire .............................................. 296Battery (vehicle) ................................ 301Jump-starting .................................... 305Towing and tow-starting .................. 307Fuses .................................................. 310

295

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesVehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit islocated in the stowage well under the trunkfloor.Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-change tool kit is in the stowage well underthe trunk floor.

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, the vehicles are not equipped with atire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang-ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. Formore information on which tire changingtools are required and approved to performa wheel change on your vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrench

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire inflation compressor; Towing eye= Tire sealant filler bottleX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 261).X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 298).

i Towing eye; is located under tire infla-tion compressor:.

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kitX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 261).X Remove the tire-change tool kit.The tire-change tool kit contains:RJackRLug wrenchROne pair of glovesRFolding wheel chock

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop-erties) (Y page 297)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 296)

296 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 336).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 157).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on the

sidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 330).MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure monitor.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the displaymessages (Y page 237).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance is approx-imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle ispartially laden and approximately 18 miles(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-ure. Make sure that you use the proper sizeand type (summer or winter tire).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended that

Flat tire 297

Breakdow

nassistance

you additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tire inflationcompressor.

298 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Using the TIREFIT kit

TIREFIT sticker, 2-partX Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the cargo compartment floor(Y page 296).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Remove filler hoseB and plug= from thebottom section of the tire inflation com-pressor housing.

X Slide the yellow filler hose connector intothe mounting on yellow capA of tire seal-ant bottle: until the plug engages.

X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellowcapA of tire sealant bottle: into the

mounting of tire inflation compressor;until the cap and both hooks engage.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valve.X Insert plug= into the socket of the ciga-rette lighter (Y page 265) or into a 12 Vpower socket in your vehicle (Y page 265).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 141).

X Press on/off switch? on the tire inflationcompressor to ON.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximum of ten minutes. The tire shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than ten minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes,see (Y page 300).

Flat tire 299

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)is not achieved after a maximum of tenminutes, see (Y page 300).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)has not been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or back upapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of ten minutes, the tirepressuremust be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

! After use, excess tire sealant may run outof the filler hose. This could cause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)has been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to theinstrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentionedabove, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-ada).

300 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release button: next to pres-sure gauge;.

X To remove the tire sealant bottle from thetire inflation compressor, press togetherthe locking tabs on the yellow cap.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the fillerhose replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be restricted. Youcould lose control of the vehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 63) and (Y page 67).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.

Battery (vehicle) 301

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away from

batteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. Check that all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster are off.Otherwise, electronic components, suchas the alternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

302 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physi-cian if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes–Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries that havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries have greaterimpact resistance and as a result there is norisk of acid burns to occupantswhen a batteryis damaged in an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcan also charge the battery with a charger

recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.Only replace a battery with a battery that hasbeen recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND,see the separate operating instructions).Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 104).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

Battery (vehicle) 303

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 305).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 305).

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster donot light up, it is highly likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case youmay neither jump-start the vehicle nor chargethe battery. The service life of a thawed-outbattery may be shorter. The starting charac-teristics can be impaired, particularly at lowtemperatures. Have the thawed-out batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Only charge the installed battery with a bat-tery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. An accessorybattery charge unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz is available. Itpermits the charging of the battery in itsinstalled position. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for further informa-tion and availability. Read the battery charg-er's operating instructions before chargingthe battery.

304 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seekmedical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting 305

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while thejumper cables are connected to the battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

306 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Press together cover: of positive clamp; and slide it back.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 346).

Towing and tow-starting 307

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-matically in certain situations. To avoiddamage to the vehicle, deactivate thesesystems in the following or similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the front axle must beraised or the entire vehicle raised andtransported.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-cle.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.When towing a vehicle, the transmissionmustbe in position N.

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the transmission to positionN.

i Disarm the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Y page 209).You could otherwise be locked out whenpushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

Example: towing eye mounting coversX Remove the towing eye from the stowagespace.The towing eye is located with the vehicletool kit under the trunk floor (Y page 261).Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towingeye is beneath the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Take cover: off the opening.X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock-wise to the stop.

308 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Position the top of cover: in the bumperand press it in at the bottom until itengages.

X Place the towing eye in the stowage wellunder the trunk floor (Y page 261).

X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back thetire inflation compressor.

Towing the vehicle with the front axleraisedOnly vehicles without 4MATIC can betowed with the front axle raised.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.

! The ignition must be switched off if thevehicle is being towed with the front axleraised. Otherwise, ESP®may intervene anddamage the brake system.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the automatic locking(Y page 209).

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and leave the SmartKey in theignition lock.

Observe the important safety notes whentowing your vehicle with the front axle raised(Y page 307).

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundi In order to signal a change of directionwhen towingwith the hazardwarning lampsswitched on, use the combination switch asusual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After reset-ting the combination switch, the hazardwarning lamp starts flashing again.

The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to positionPwhen you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock. In orderto ensure that the automatic transmissionstays in position N when towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).

It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 307).

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

Towing and tow-starting 309

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Shift the transmission to position N.As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could other-wise damage the automatic transmission.

i You can find information on "Jump-start-ing" under (Y page 305).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Only use fuses marked with an"S". Otherwise, components or systemscould be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-

nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 157).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it (Y page 141). Allindicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellThe fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box inthe front-passenger footwell (Y page 311).

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

310 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

X Open the hood.X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: open clamps;.X Fold up cover: in the direction of thearrow and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is seatedcorrectly in cover:.

X Insert cover: at the back into openings= on the fuse box.

X Fold down cover:.X Hook clamps; into the fuse box andclose.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well

X To open: remove the floormat from thefront-passenger side.

X Fold out perforated floor covering: in thedirection of the arrow.

X To release cover=, press retainingclamp;.

X Fold out cover= in the direction of thearrow to the catch.

X Remove cover= forwards.

i Fuse allocation chart? is located on thelower right-hand side of cover=.

X To close: insert cover= on the left-handside of the fuse box into the retainer.Cover= engages in the retainers.

X Fold down cover= until clamps; lockaudibly.

X Fold back perforated floor covering:.

Fuses 311

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

312

Useful information ............................ 314Important safety notes .................... 314Operation ........................................... 314Winter operation ............................... 316Tire pressure ..................................... 317Loading the vehicle .......................... 324Maximum load rating ....................... 327Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 328Tire labeling ....................................... 329Definition of terms for tires andloading ............................................... 333Changing a wheel ............................. 335Wheel and tire combinations ........... 340

313

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are notbeing used correctly can impair operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be found(Y page 340).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 156)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 317)

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Information on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check thetire pressures and correct them if neces-sary.RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteris-tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-cate that the wheels or tires are damaged.If you suspect that a tire is defective,reduce your speed immediately. Stop thevehicle as soon as possible to check thewheels and tires for damage. Hidden tiredamage could also be causing the unusual

314 OperationWheelsandtires

handling characteristics. If you find nosigns of damage, have the wheels and tireschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similar eleva-tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly thesidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam-age such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 315). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 317).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Important safety notes on the tiretread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.

Operation 315

Wheelsandtires

Z

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depth isapproximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 297).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RAfter mounting new tires, break them in atmoderate speeds for the first 60 miles(100 km), as they only reach their full per-formance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure monitorand only on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 297).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended that

you additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 336).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.

316 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.Once the winter tires are mounted:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 320).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 323).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are mounted on the rearwheels, the snow chains could cause abrasionto the vehicle body or to chassis components.This could cause damage to the vehicle or thetires. There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever mount snow chains on the rearwheelsRonly mount snow chains in pairs on thefront wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if youmount snow chains on steel wheels, youmay damage the hub caps. Remove the hubcaps from the relevant wheels beforemounting the snow chains.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 340).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RWhen snow chains are installed, never useActive Parking Assist (Y page 181).

i You may wish to deactivate ESP®(Y page 68) when pulling away with snowchains installed. You can thereby allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-ieving an increased driving force (cuttingaction).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.

Tire pressure 317

Wheelsandtires

Z

Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.1.) Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-cle (Y page 324).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

: Recommended tire pressuresOption 2) Tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for various

operating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustration pur-poses only. Tire pressure specifications arevehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata shown here. Tire pressure specifica-tions applicable to your vehicle are locatedin your vehicle's tire pressure table.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size andcan be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 330).

318 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded and

malfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Tire pressure 319

Wheelsandtires

Z

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Rwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumptionRoverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristics

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRbe more susceptible to damageRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRincrease the braking distance

Maximum tire pressuresNever exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-

ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 317).

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the "Tire pressure information" sec-tion (Y page 317).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure information" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire and

320 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Loading Information placard on the B-pillaron the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value (Y page 317).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air bypressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire Pressure Monitor

General notesIf a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressuremonitor only functions if the correct sensorsare installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceServicemenu of the mul-tifunction display.

Example: current tire pressure display

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 322).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check the

Tire pressure 321

Wheelsandtires

Z

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 317). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 323). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 317).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Further information can be found on(Y page 237).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take more than ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When the mal-function has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 141).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message is shown.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire Pressure

322 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Monitor ActiveMonitor Active message is shown insteadof the tire pressure display. The tire pressuresare already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lightcomes on.RIf the Correct Tire PressureCorrect Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in at least one tire is too lowand must be corrected at the next oppor-tunity.RIf the Check Tire Pressure SoonCheck Tire Pressure Soon mes-sage appears in the multifunction display,the tire pressure in one or more tires hasdropped significantly and the tires must bechecked.RIf the Tire Pressure Warning TireTire Pressure Warning TireFailureFailure message appears in the multi-function display, the tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly and thetires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 237).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may be dis-played for the wrong positions for a shorttime. This is rectified after a few minutes ofdriving, and the tire pressures are displayedfor the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, you

can also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 317).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 317).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for each tire or the TireTirepressure will be displayed afterpressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutesdriving a few minutes message.

X Press the: button.The multifunction display shows the UseUseCurrentCurrent PressuresPressures asas NewNew ReferenceReferenceValuesValues message.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 323

Wheelsandtires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

: B-pillar, driver's sideTwo instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried

by one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible load is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data shown here. The maxi-mum permissible load that applies for yourvehicle can be found on your vehicle's Tireand Loading Information placard.

324 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1,400 lbs and there will be five150-lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1,400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Refer tothis Operator's Manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle(Y page 327).

Loading the vehicle 325

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure youare using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard (Y page 325).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

326 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible load andtrailer load/nose-weight (maximumpermissible load rat-ing from the Tire andLoading Informationplacard minus thegross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg)= 750 lbs(340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs(435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs(612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 324).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-ble) must not exceed the permissible grossvehicle weight.Gross axleweight rating: themaximumper-missible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usually between10% and 15% of the gross weight of the trailerand its load.

Maximum load rating

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 324).

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Maximum load rating 327

Wheelsandtires

Z

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. Tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors: tread wear:, tire trac-tion;, and heat resistance=. These regu-lations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless,all tires sold in North America are providedwith the corresponding quality grading mark-ings on the sidewall of the tire.All passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.Where applicable, the tire grading informa-tion can be found on the tire sidewall betweenthe tread shoulder and maximum tire width.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

For example:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm, due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) for all four wintertires (Y page 316) to maintain normal drivingcharacteristics in winter. Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is still consider-ably greater than when the road is not cov-ered with ice or snow. Take appropriate carewhen driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

328 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsWheelsandtires

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. These represent the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability to dis-sipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tiresmustmeet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labeling

The followingmarkings are on the tire in addition tothe tire name (sales designation) and the manu-facturer's name:: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard

(Y page 333); DOT, Tire Identification Number

(Y page 332)= Maximum tire load (Y page 327)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 320)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 333)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed index (Y page 330)D Load index (Y page 332)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire labeling 329

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is thesize ratio between the tire height and the tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load bearing index: load bearing indexA isa numerical code which specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 324).Example:A load-bearing index of 91 indicates a maxi-mum load of 1,356lb (615kg) that can be car-ried by the tires. For further information onthe maximum tire load in kilograms andpounds, see (Y page 327).For further information on the load-bearingindex, see Load index (Y page 332).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully and

330 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

adapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).The service specifications consist of loadbearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating andthe maximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186mph (300km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifi-cation must be given in brackets. Example:

275/40 ZR18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)"indicates that the maximum speed of thetire is over 186mph (300km/h). Ask thetire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S3 up to 100mph (160 km/h)

T M+S3 up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H M+S3 up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V M+S3 up to 149mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.Winter tires have, in addition to the M+Sidentification, thei snow flake symbolon the tire sidewall. Tires with this markingfulfill the requirements of the Rubber Man-ufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rub-ber Association of Canada (RAC) regardingthe tire traction on snow. They have beenespecially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph(210km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 340).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

3 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 331

Wheelsandtires

Z

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed indexB(Y page 330) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Canadian tire regulations prescribe that everynew tire manufacturer or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers orretreaders to notify customers of recalls orother safety-related matters. It makes it pos-sible for the purchaser to easily identify theaffected tires.The TIN consists of the manufacturer identi-fication code;, tire size=, tire typecode? and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the Canadian Trans-port Ministry.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.Further information about retreaded tires(Y page 314).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

332 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

Tire characteristics

This information describes the tire cord andthe number of layers in sidewall: and undertire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and load-ing

Tire ply composition and materialusedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe Canadian Transport Ministry.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehi-cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for the vehi-cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal-led on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 333

Wheelsandtires

Z

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalentof 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including themaximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

334 Definition of terms for tires and loadingWheelsandtires

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardpart and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of the accesso-ries.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num-ber of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section(Y page 296). Information on driving withMOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can

Changing a wheel 335

Wheelsandtires

Z

be found under "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" (Y page 297).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes when changing a wheel(Y page 335).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotatedevery 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac-tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually(Y page 158).

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to positionP.

X Switch off the engine.

336 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 296).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level ground

X On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

Observe the following when raising thevehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.

Changing a wheel 337

Wheelsandtires

Z

Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat, load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.Rdo not lie under the vehicle.Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.Rnever open or close a door or the bootwhenthe vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Steel wheel with wheel trimX Vehicles with steel wheels: carefullyreach into two of the wheel trim openingsand remove the wheel trim.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thewheel housings of the front wheels and just infront of the wheel housings of the rear wheels(arrows).AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: to protect the vehicle body, thevehicle has covers installed next to the jack-ing points on the outer sills.

Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equip-ment)

338 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: fold cover; upwards.

X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-changing tool kit and place it on the hexa-gon nut of the jack so that the letters AUFare visible.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

ExampleX Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until the tire israised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from theground.

Removing a wheel

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 336).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Changing a wheel 339

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB arevisible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The specified tightening torque is96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the vehicle again.

X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: insert the cover into the outersill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 317).i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: allwheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-sion variations could cause the tires to

340 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

come into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre-vious damage cannot always be detectedon retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety ifretreaded tires are mounted. Do not mountused tires if you have no information abouttheir previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 317).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)

Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 297).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rim and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessaryto obtain wheel rims in the correspondingsize. The size of the approved winter tiresmay differ from the standard tires. This isdependent on the model and the equip-ment installed at the factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

Wheel and tire combinations 341

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

CLA 250

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 V4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)

BA: 225/45 R17 91 W4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/40R18 92 W XL4, 5, 6 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

All-weather tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H XL M+S5, 4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)

Winter tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+Si5 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains.5 Also available as MOExtended tires.6 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tire combination" section.

342 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

CLA 250 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 V4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)

BA: 225/45 R17 91 W4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)

R 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/40 R18 92 W XL5, 4, 6 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

All-weather tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H XL M+S5, 4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)

Winter tiresR 17

Tires Wheels

BA: 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+Si5 BA: 6.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)

CLA 45 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains.5 Also available as MOExtended tires.6 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tire combination" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 343

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 19

Tires Wheels

BA: 235/35 ZR19 91 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Wheels

BA: 215/45 R18 93 V XL M+Si BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.67 in (42.5 mm)

BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains.

344 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Useful information ............................ 346Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 346Identification plates ......................... 346Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 347Vehicle data ...................................... 353

345

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Information regarding technical data

General informationi The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is used only as an example. Thisdata is different for every vehicle and candeviate from the data shown here. You canfind the data applicable to your vehicle onthe vehicle identification plate.

346 Identification platesTechnicaldata

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-most position.

X Fold up floor covering: in front of theright-hand front seat.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 347)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 346)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Engine number (stamped into the crank-

case)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. You should therefore only use prod-ucts that have been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.Information about tested and approved prod-ucts can be obtained from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Service products and filling capacities 347

Technicaldata

Z

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capa-city

AMG vehicles 14.8 US gal(56.0 l)

All other models 13.2 US gal(50.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

AMG vehicles Approx.2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

All other models Approx.1.6 US gal(6.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. This can otherwise lead to enginedamage. This does not include cleaningadditives for the removal and prevention ofresidue build-up. gasoline may only bemixed with cleaning additives recommen-

348 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

ded by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives".You can obtain further information fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gas-oline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used.Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

CLA 250, CLA 250 4MATIC: as a temporarymeasure, if the recommended fuel is notavailable, you may also use regular unleadedgasoline with an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.All othermodels: as a temporary measure, ifthe recommended fuel is not available, youmay also use regular unleaded gasoline withan octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This mayreduce engine performance and increase fuelconsumption. Avoid driving at full throttle andsudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuelwith a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 155).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-line may be mixed with the cleaning additiverecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 347).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. You should therefore only use

Service products and filling capacities 349

Technicaldata

Z

engine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

CLA 250CLA 250 4MATIC

270 229.5

AMG vehicles 133 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

CLA 250CLA 250 4MATIC

5.9 US qt (5.6 l)

AMG vehicles 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 347).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

350 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly ata qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter-net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 347).

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-ucts 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

AMG vehicles Approx. 9.1 US qt(8.6 l)

All other models Approx. 8.2 US qt(7.8 l)

i Use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitoraccording to MB approval 325.0 or 326.0.

Service products and filling capacities 351

Technicaldata

Z

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highly flam-mable. If it comes into contact with hot enginecomponents or the exhaust system it couldignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling washer fluid(Y page 347).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-ature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB Win-terFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Win-terFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the left, on theunderside of the hood.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping-up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

352 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Warning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Refrigerant

CLA 250

CLA 250 4MATIC 22.9 ± 0.4 oz(650 ± 10 g)

AMG vehicles 23.6 ± 0.4 oz(670 ± 10 g)

Model PAG oil

CLA 250

CLA 250 4MATIC 4.2 oz(120 g)

AMG vehicles

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Model ::

Openingheight

AMG vehicles 68.0 in(1727 mm)

All other models 68.9 in(1749 mm)

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

80.0 in (2032 mm)

Vehicle height 56.5 in (1436 mm)

Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm)

Turning radius 36.1 ft (11 m)

Maximum roofload

Model Vehicle length

AMG vehicles 184.7 in(4691 mm)

All other models 182.3 in(4630 mm)

Vehicle data 353

Technicaldata

Z

Model Vehicle height

AMG vehicles 55.7 in (1416 mm)

All other models 56.5 in (1436 mm)

354 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

355

356